EP1089981A1 - Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis. - Google Patents

Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis.

Info

Publication number
EP1089981A1
EP1089981A1 EP99937164A EP99937164A EP1089981A1 EP 1089981 A1 EP1089981 A1 EP 1089981A1 EP 99937164 A EP99937164 A EP 99937164A EP 99937164 A EP99937164 A EP 99937164A EP 1089981 A1 EP1089981 A1 EP 1089981A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
substituted
group
alkyl
phenyl
heteroaryl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP99937164A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Inventor
James E. Audia
Richard C. Thompson
Stephen C. Wilkie
Thomas C. Britton
Warren J. Porter
George W. Huffman
Lee H. Latimer
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Elan Pharmaceuticals LLC
Eli Lilly and Co
Original Assignee
Elan Pharmaceuticals LLC
Eli Lilly and Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Elan Pharmaceuticals LLC, Eli Lilly and Co filed Critical Elan Pharmaceuticals LLC
Publication of EP1089981A1 publication Critical patent/EP1089981A1/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D221/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not provided for by groups C07D211/00 - C07D219/00
    • C07D221/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom, not provided for by groups C07D211/00 - C07D219/00 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D221/22—Bridged ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D223/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D223/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D223/18—Dibenzazepines; Hydrogenated dibenzazepines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D243/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D243/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4
    • C07D243/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D243/12—1,5-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,5-benzodiazepines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D243/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D243/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4
    • C07D243/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D243/14—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D243/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D243/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4
    • C07D243/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D243/14—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines
    • C07D243/16—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals
    • C07D243/18—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals substituted in position 2 by nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D243/24—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/06—Peri-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates to compounds which inhibit ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. 5
  • AD Alzheimer's Disease
  • AD failureia
  • AD in aged humans and is believed to represent the fourth most common medical cause of death in the United States.
  • AD has been observed in races and ethnic groups worldwide and presents a major present and future public health problem. The disease is currently estimated to affect about two to three million individuals in the United States alone. AD is at present incurable. No treatment that effectively prevents AD or reverses its symptoms and course is currently known.
  • the brains of individuals with AD exhibit characteristic lesions termed senile (or amyloid) plaques, amyloid angiopathy (amyloid deposits in blood vessels) and neurofibrillary tangles.
  • senile or amyloid
  • amyloid angiopathy amyloid deposits in blood vessels
  • neurofibrillary tangles Large numbers of these lesions, particularly amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles, are generally found in several areas of the human brain important for memory and cognitive function in patients with AD. Smaller numbers of these lesions in a more restrictive anatomical distribution are also found in the brains of most aged humans who do not have clinical AD.
  • Amyloid plaques and amyloid angiopathy also characterize the brains of individuals with Trisomy 21 (Down's Syndrome) and Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage with Amyloidosis of the Dutch Type (HCHWA-D).
  • a definitive diagnosis of AD usually requires observing the aforementioned lesions in the brain tissue of patients who have died with the disease or, rarely, in small biopsied samples of brain tissue taken during an invasive neurosurgical procedure.
  • amyloid angiopathy amyloid angiopathy characteristic of AD and the other disorders mentioned above is an approximately 4.2 kilodalton (kD) protein of about 39-43 amino acids designated the ⁇ -amyloid peptide ( ⁇ AP) or sometimes A ⁇ , A ⁇ P or ⁇ /A4.
  • ⁇ AP ⁇ -amyloid peptide
  • ⁇ -Amyloid peptide was first purified and a partial amino acid sequence was provided by Glenner, et al. 1 The isolation procedure and the sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,666,829 2 .
  • ⁇ -amyloid peptide is a small fragment of a much larger precursor protein termed the amyloid precursor protein (APP), that is normally produced by cells in many tissues of various animals, including humans.
  • APP amyloid precursor protein
  • Knowledge of the structure of the gene encoding APP has demonstrated that ⁇ -amyloid peptide arises as a peptide fragment that is cleaved from APP by protease enzyme(s).
  • protease enzyme(s) The precise biochemical mechanism by which the ⁇ -amyloid peptide fragment is cleaved from APP and subsequently deposited as amyloid plaques in the cerebral tissue and in the walls of the cerebral and meningeal blood vessels is currently unknown.
  • a mutation at amino acid 693 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP has been identified as the cause of the ⁇ -amyloid peptide deposition disease, HCHWA-D, and a change from alanine to glycine at amino acid 692 appears to cause a phenotype that resembles AD is some patients but HCHWA-D in others.
  • the discovery of these and other mutations in APP in genetically based cases of AD prove that alteration of APP and subsequent deposition of its ⁇ -amyloid peptide fragment can cause AD.
  • the treatment methods would advantageously be based on drugs which are capable of inhibiting ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in vivo.
  • This invention is directed to the discovery of a class of compounds which inhibit ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis and, therefore, are useful in the prevention of AD in patients susceptible to AD and/or in the treatment of patients with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in their condition.
  • W is a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
  • ring A together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic
  • ring B together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic
  • ring C together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
  • Y is represented by the formula:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkenyl, substimted alkynyl, substimted cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R 2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R 4 is independently selected from the group consisting of al
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substimted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy;
  • Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S O ;
  • Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R 1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR 6 , wherein R 6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
  • X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro
  • X is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to about 6; / is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • This invention also provides for novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the formula I above.
  • this invention is directed to a method for inhibiting ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of fo ⁇ nula I above effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of ⁇ -amyloid peptide.
  • this invention is directed to a prophylactic method for preventing the onset of AD in a patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixmre of compounds of formula I above.
  • this invention is directed to a therapeutic method for treating a patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixmre of compounds of formula I above.
  • rings A and B may be the same or different and are preferably independently selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic. More preferably, rings A and B are independently selected from the group consisting of aryl and cycloalkyl. Still more preferably, rings A and B are independently aryl.
  • Particularly preferred A and B rings include, by way of example, phenyl, substimted phenyl, including fluoro-substimted phenyl, cyclohexyl and the like.
  • Preferred C rings include, by way of example, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, mo ⁇ holino and the like.
  • R 1 is preferably aryl (including substituted aryl) or heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl).
  • R 1 groups include
  • R b wherein R c is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein R b and R c are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring wherein the heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring contains from 3 to 8 atoms of which from 1 to 3 are heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur;
  • R b and R b are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when R c is hydrogen, then R b and R b are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
  • substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group, and
  • particularly preferred substimted phenyl R 1 groups include mono-, di- and tri-substituted phenyl groups including 3,5-disubstituted phenyls such as 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl, etc.; 3,4-disubstituted phenyls such as 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl, 3, 4-methy lenedioxyphenyl, etc.; 4-substituted phenyls such as 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4- ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl
  • R 1 groups for when m is zero include 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 4- phenylfurazan-3-yl, and the like.
  • R 1 substituents include, by way of example, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, 5- indolyl, phenyl, and the like.
  • R 1 groups include unsubstituted aryl groups such as phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, etc. ; substimted aryl groups such as monosubstimted phenyls (preferably substiments at 3 or 5 positions); disubstituted phenyls (preferably substituents at 3 and 5 positions); and trisubstituted phenyls (preferably substituents at the 3,4,5 positions).
  • the substituted phenyl groups do not include more than 3 substituents.
  • substimted phenyls include, for instance, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2- bromophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2-methy lphenyl, 2- methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethy lphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methy lphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl,
  • R 1 groups include, by way of example, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4-phenyl-n-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wo-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, iso- valeryl, n-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1- enyl, cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH 2 -cyclopropyl, -CH 2 -cyclobutyl, - CH 2 -cyclohexyl, -CH 2 -cyclopentyl, -CH 2 CH 2 -cyclopropy
  • R 2 is preferably selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
  • Each R 2' is preferably (and independently) selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
  • R 2 and R 2' substiments include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, ⁇ r ⁇ -propyl, n- butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH 2 CH(CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 , 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6- fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, iso- but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH 2 -cyclopropyl, -CH 2 -cyclohexyl, -CH 2 CH 2 - cyclopropyl, -CH 2 CH 2 -cyclohexyl, -CH 2 -indol-3-yl, /?-(phenyl)phenyl,
  • R 2' is methyl.
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
  • R 3 is alkyl, substimted alkyl or aryl. More preferably, R 3 is alkyl.
  • R 3 substituents include, by way of example, hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3- dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • R 4 is preferably alkyl or substimted alkyl.
  • R 5 is preferably alkyl; substituted alkyl; phenyl; substituted phenyl, such as 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl and the like; cycloalkyl, such as cyclohexyl and the like; or heteroaryl or heterocyclic, such as 1-piperdinyl, 2-pyridyl, 2-thiazyl, 2-thienyl and the like.
  • / is 0 or 1. More preferably, / is 0.
  • Y is the group -(CHR 2' ) a -NH-
  • the integer a is preferably 2, 3 or 4, more preferably 2 or 4, and still more preferably a is equal to 2.
  • Y has the formula -CHR 2 -CH 2 -NH-, where R 2' is as defined herein, including the described preferred embodiments.
  • W is a cyclic group of the formula:
  • each R 6 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -
  • each R 7 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, - SO-aryl,
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; p is an integer from 0 to 4; q is an integer from 0 to 4.
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, alkyl, substimted alkyl, amino, substimted amino, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano. halo, nitro, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy. More preferably, when present, R 6 and R 7 are fluoro.
  • R 8 is preferably selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl and substimted cycloalkyl. More preferably, R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
  • R 8 substiments include, by way of example, hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3- dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • W is a cyclic group of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 7 , and p are as defined herein and r is an integer from 0 to 3.
  • W is a cyclic group of the formula:
  • R 6 and p are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 and p are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 and p are as defined herein; and each R 9 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; and g is an integer from 0 to 2.
  • R 9 is preferably alkyl or substimted alkyl.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 , R 9 , g and p are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 , R 9 , g and /? are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , each R 8 and p are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 9 (R 9 ) c wherein R 6 , each R 8 , R 9 , g and /? are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 and p are as defined herein;
  • R 10 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, substimted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 10 and p are as defined herein;
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 , R 9 , g and p are as defined herein; and Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O) 2 -.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • R 6 , R 8 and p are as defined herein.
  • W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
  • the products of this invention include mixtures of R,S enantiomers at any stereochemical center.
  • the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative.
  • a mixture of R,S enantiomers at the stereochemical center is sometimes indicated by a squiggly line as per convention. Othertimes, no stereochemical designation is made at the stereochemical center and this also infers that a mixture of enantiomers is present.
  • prodrugs of the compounds of formula I above including acylated forms of alcohols and thiols, aminals of one or more amines, and the like.
  • this invention relates to compounds which inhibit ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease.
  • ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis relates to compounds which inhibit ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease.
  • ⁇ -amyloid peptide refers to a 39-43 amino acid peptide having a molecular weight of about 4.2 kD, which peptide is substantially homologous to the form of the protein described by Glenner, et al. 1 including mutations and post-translational modifications of the normal ⁇ -amyloid peptide.
  • the ⁇ -amyloid peptide is an approximate 39-43 amino acid fragment of a large membrane-spanning glycoprotein, referred to as the ⁇ -amyloid precursor protein (APP). Its 43-amino acid sequence is:
  • Alkyl refers to monovalent alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, w ⁇ -propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, n- hexyl, and the like.
  • Substimted alkyl refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 5 substituents,.
  • substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, - SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted alkyl
  • Alkylene refers to divalent alkylene groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -) and the like.
  • Substimted alkylene refers to an alkylene group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted
  • substimted alkylene groups include those where 2 substiments on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group.
  • fused cycloalkyl groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures.
  • Substimted alkenylene refers to an alkenylene group, preferably of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted
  • Alkaryl refers to -alkylene-aryl groups preferably having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms in the alkylene moiety and from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the aryl moiety. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group “alkyl-O-" .
  • Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, /s ⁇ -propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, 5ec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • Substimted alkoxy refers to the group “substimted alkyl-O-" where substimted alkyl is as defined above.
  • Alkylalkoxy refers to the group “-alkylene-O-alkyl” which includes by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH 2 OCH 3 ), ethylenemethoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 ), n-propylene- ⁇ r ⁇ -propoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH(CH 3 ) 2 ), methylene-t-butoxy (-CH 2 -O-C(CH 3 ) 3 ) and the like.
  • Alkylthioalkoxy refers to the group “-alkylene-S-alkyl” which includes by way of example, methylenethiomethoxy (-CH 2 SCH 3 ), ethylenethiomethoxy
  • alkenyl refers to alkenyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation.
  • Substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted alkyl, -SO 2 -
  • Alkynyl refers to alkynyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH) and the like.
  • Substimted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted alkyl, -SO 2
  • Acyl refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substimted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic -C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Acylamino refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group, wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Amino refers to the group -NH 2 .
  • Substimted amino refers to the group -N(R) 2 where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group.
  • both R groups are hydrogen
  • -N(R) 2 is an amino group.
  • substituted amino groups include, by way of illustration, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and the like.
  • amino-blocking group or “amino-protecting group” refers to any group which, when bound to an amino group, prevents undesired reactions from occurring at the amino group and which may be removed by conventional chemical and/or enzymatic procedures to reestablish the amino group. Any known amino-blocking group may be used in this invention. Typically, the amino-blocking group is selected so as to render the resulting blocked-amino group unreactive to the particular reagents and reaction conditions employed in a subsequent pre -determined chemical reaction or series of reactions. After completion of the reaction(s), the amino-blocking group is selectively removed to regenerate the amino group.
  • Suitable amino-blocking groups include, by way of illustration, tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc), benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz), acetyl, l-(l'-adamantyl)-l-methylethoxycarbonyl (Acm), allyloxycarbonyl (Aloe), benzyloxymethyl (Bom), 2- -biphenylisopropyloxycarbonyl (Bpoc), tert- butyldimethylsilyl (Bsi), benzoyl (Bz), benzyl (Bn), 9-fluorenyl- methyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), 4-methy lbenzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, 2- nitrophenylsulfenyl (Nps), 3-nitro-2-pyridinesulfenyl (NPys), trifluoroacetyl (Tfa), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzyl (Tmo
  • Aminoacyl refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyloxy refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Alkyloxy refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl-C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)O-, heteroaryl- C(O)O-, and heterocyclic-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Aryl refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino. alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino.
  • thioalkoxy substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl.
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
  • Aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substimted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • Carboxyalkyl refers to the groups “-C(O)Oalkyl” and “-C(O)O- substimted alkyl” where alkyl is as defined above.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 12 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
  • “Substimted cycloalkyl” refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3) substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation.
  • Suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
  • Substituted cycloalkenyl refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro,
  • -SO-alkyl -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 - substituted alkyl, -SO 2 -aryl, and -SO 2 -heteroaryl.
  • Halo or “halogen” refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either fluoro or chloro.
  • Heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substimted with 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkoxy, substimted alkenyl, substimted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -
  • heteroaryl groups can have a single ring
  • heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
  • Heteroaryloxy refers to the group “-O-heteroaryl”.
  • Heterocycle or “heterocyclic” refers to a monovalent saturated or unsamrated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring.
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl,
  • heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole.
  • Heterocyclooxy refers to the group “-O-heterocycle”.
  • Oxyacylamino refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • Thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-alkyl.
  • Substimted thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • Thioaryloxy refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
  • Thioheteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substimted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • 4,5,6 , 7-tetrahy dro-3 , 7-methano-3H-3-benzazonin-2( 1 H)-one refers to a polycyclic e-caprolactam ring system having the fo ⁇ nula:
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of formula I which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like can be used as the pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • protecting group or “blocking group” refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, carboxyl groups or other protectable functional group of the compounds which prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the unprotected functional group.
  • removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substiments such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t- butyl-diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild hydrolysis conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • a protected aldehyde or ketone J (where B 1 is a protecting group and R 2' and a are as defined herein) can be coupled with an amine compound, such as 2 (where R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , p and q are as defined herein), by conventional reductive amination to provide, after deprotection, intermediate 3.
  • amine 2 is merely representative and those skilled in the art will recognize that amino derivatives of any of the other ring systems described herein may be employed in this reaction.
  • this reaction is conducted by contacting amine 2 with an excess of 1, preferably with 1.1 to 2 equivalents of J., and an excess, preferably 1.1 to 1.5 equivalents, of a reducing agent, such as sodium cyanoborohydride.
  • a reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride.
  • this reaction is conducted in an essentially inert diluent, such as methanol, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C, preferably at ambient temperamre, for about 0.5 to 3 hours. Removal of the amine protecting group using conventional procedures and reagents then affords intermediate 3.
  • Intermediate 3 can then be acylated or coupled with a carboxylic acid, e.g. , 4 (where R 1 , T, X' and X" are as defined herein), to provide compound 5.
  • This reaction is typically conducted using conventional coupling reagents and procedures and at least a stoichiometric amount of intermediate 3 and carboxylic acid 4.
  • well known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides with or without the use of well known additives such as N-hydroxysuccinimide, 1- hydroxy benzotriazole, etc. can be used to facilitate coupling.
  • reaction (1) is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • the acid halide of compound 4 can be employed in reaction (1) and, when so employed, it is typically employed in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction.
  • suitable bases include, by way of example, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N- methylmo ⁇ holine and the like.
  • compound 5 can be prepared by reductive amination of a compound of formula 6:
  • R 1 , R 2 , T, X', X" and a are as defined herein, with amine 2, using conventional reagents and procedures.
  • B 2 is a suitable amine protecting group and R 1 , R 2 and a are as defined herein, with amine 2, followed by deprotection using conventional procedures.
  • the compounds of formula I can be prepared by further reductive alkylation of intermediate 3 with, for example, compound 6 or 7, using conventional reagents and procedures.
  • intermediate 3 can be reductively alkylated with protected aldehyde or ketone 1 and the resulting intermediate deprotected and acylated using procedures similar to those described above.
  • R 1 , R 2 , Z and m are as defined herein, using conventional coupling reagents and procedures such as those described above, to afford compounds of fo ⁇ nula I.
  • compounds of formula I can be prepared by first coupling an amine, such as 2, with a protected carboxylic acid 9, and then, after deprotection, reductively alkylating the resulting intermediate 10 as illustrated in Scheme 2.
  • the aldehyde, ketone or carboxylic acid units may also be coupled together prior to reaction with an amine using the reductive amination or acylation procedures described above, as appropriate.
  • the resulting intermediate is then coupled to the amine, such as 2, to afford compounds of formula I.
  • aldehyde, ketone and carboxylic acids employed in the above reactions can be readily prepared by several divergent synthetic routes with the particular route selected relative to the ease of compound preparation, commercial availability of starting materials, whether m is zero or one, whether n is one or two, etc.
  • the aldehyde and ketone compounds, e.g. 1, 6 and 7, employed in this invention can be readily prepared by oxidizing the corresponding alcohol using conventional oxidizing agents.
  • Swern oxidation of N-protected amino primary alcohols affords the corresponding aldehyde.
  • this reaction is conducted by contacting the alcohol with a mixture of oxalyl chloride and dimethyl sulfoxide in the presence of a tertiary amine, such as triethylamine.
  • a tertiary amine such as triethylamine.
  • this reaction is conducted in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at an intial temperature of about -78 °C and then at ambient temperamre for about 0.25 to 2 hours to afford the aldehyde.
  • the alcohols employed in this reaction are either commercially available or can be prepared using conventional reagents and procedures.
  • suitable alcohols can be prepared by reduction of the corresponding amino acids or amino
  • the carboxylic acids of fo ⁇ nula 8, where m is 0, can be prepared by various conventional procedures. For example, reaction of a halo acetic acid 11
  • a suitable haloacetic acid derivative JJ is reacted with a primary amine 12 under conditions which provide for amino acid J3.
  • This reaction is described by, for example, Yates, et al. 10 and proceeds by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of haloacetic acid JJ with primary amine 12 in a suitable inert diluent such as water, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and the like.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • the reaction employs an excess of a suitable base such as sodium bicarbonate, sodium hydroxide, etc. to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction.
  • the reaction is preferably conducted at from about 25 °C to about 100°C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours.
  • N- substimted amino acid 13 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like.
  • Each of the reagents employed in this reaction e.g. , haloacetic acid 11. and primary amine J2
  • haloacetic acid 11. and primary amine J2 are well known in the art with a plurality of each being commercially available.
  • the R 1 group can be coupled to an alanine ester (or other suitable amino acid ester) by conventional N-arylation.
  • a stoichiometric equivalent or slight excess of the amino acid ester can be dissolved in a suitable diluent such as DMSO and coupled with a halo-R 1 compound, Z'-R 1 where Z' is a halo group such as chloro or bromo and R 1 is as defmed above.
  • the reaction is conducted in the presence of an excess of base such as sodium hydroxide to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction.
  • the reaction typically proceeds at from 15 °C to about 250°C and is complete in about 1 to 24 hours.
  • N-substituted amino acid ester is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like. This ester is then hydrolyzed by conventional methods to provide for carboxylic acid 8, where m is 0.
  • ester ified amino acids of formula 8, where m is 0, can be prepared by reductive amination of a suitable pyruvate ester J4 (where R is typically an alkyl group and R 2 is as defined above) with a primary amine J2 (where R 1 is as defined herein) in the manner illustrated in Scheme 4.
  • the reaction shown in Scheme 4 is typically conducted by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of pyruvate ester J4 and amine J2 in an inert diluent such as methanol, ethanol and the like under conditions which provide for imine formation (not shown).
  • the imine formed is then reduced under conventional conditions by a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride, H 2 /palladium on carbon and the like to form the N-substituted amino acid ester J5.
  • the reducing agent is H 2 /palladium on carbon which is inco ⁇ orated into the initial reaction medium which permits imine reduction in situ in a one pot procedure to provide for the N- substimted amino acid ester J5.
  • reaction is preferably conducted at from about 20 °C to about 80 °C at a pressure of from 1 to 10 atmospheres until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours.
  • N-substituted amino acid ester 15 is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like. Subsequent hydrolysis of the ester J5 leads to the corresponding carboxylic acid derivative 8, where m is 0.
  • the carboxylic acids of formula 8, where m is 1, can be prepared by conventional coupling of an acetic acid derivative 4 (where R 1 , T, X' and X" are as defined herein) with a primary amine of an esterified amino acid (where R is typically an alkyl group and R 2 is as defined herein) as illustrated in Scheme 5.
  • this reaction merely involves coupling of a suitable acetic acid derivative 4 with the primary amine of amino acid ester 16 under conditions which provide for the N-acetyl derivative J7.
  • This reaction is conventionally conducted as described for peptide synthesis and synthetic methods used therein can also be employed to prepare the N-acetyl amino acid esters J7 of this invention.
  • well known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides with or without the use of well known additives such as ⁇ - hydroxysuccinimide, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, etc. can be used to facilitate coupling.
  • the reaction is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • the acid halide of compound 4 can be employed and, when so employed, it is typically employed in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction.
  • Suitable bases include, by way of example, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N- methylmo ⁇ holine and the like.
  • the coupling reaction of 4 and J6 is preferably conducted at from about 0°C to about 60 °C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours.
  • reaction completion N-acetyl amino acid ester J7 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like or alternatively is hydrolyzed to the corresponding acid without purification and/or isolation other than conventional work-up (e.g., aqueous extraction, etc.).
  • reagents e.g., acetic acid derivative 4 and amino acid ester 16
  • acetic acid derivative 4 and amino acid ester 16 are well known in the art with a plurality of each being commercially available.
  • Carboxylic acids such as 4 can also be coupled to amines prepared by use of polymer supported forms of carbodiimide peptide coupling reagents.
  • a polymer supported form of EDC for example, has been described (Tetrahedron Letters, 34(48), 7685 (1993)) 11 .
  • PEPC polymer supported form of EDC
  • Polymers suitable for use in making a polymer supported coupling reagent are either commercially available or may be prepared by methods well known to the artisan skilled in the polymer arts.
  • a suitable polymer must possess pendant sidechains bearing moieties reactive with the terminal amine of the carbodiimide. Such reactive moieties include chloro, bromo, iodo and methanesulfonyl. Preferably, the reactive moiety is a chloromethyl group.
  • the polymer's backbone must be inert to both the carbodiimide and reaction conditions under which the ultimate polymer bound coupling reagents will be used.
  • hydroxymethylated resins may be converted into chloromethylated resins useful for the preparation of polymer supported coupling reagents.
  • hydroxylated resins include the 4-hydroxymethylphenyl- acetamidomethyl resin (Pam Resin) and 4-benzyloxybenzyl alcohol resin (Wang Resin) available from Advanced Chemtech of Louisville, Kentucky, USA (see
  • Preferred resins are the chloromethylated styrene/divinylbenzene resins because of their ready commercial availability. As the name suggests, these resins are already chloromethylated and require no chemical modification prior to use. These resins are commercially known as Merrifield 's resins and are available from Aldrich Chemical Company of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA (see Aldrich 1994-1995 catalog, page 899). Methods for the preparation of PEPC and its polymer supported forms are outlined in Scheme 6.
  • PEPC is prepared by first reacting ethyl isocyanate with l-(3-aminopropyl)pyrrolidine. The resulting urea is treated with 4-toluenesulfonyl chloride to provide PEPC. The polymer supported form is prepared by reaction of PEPC with an appropriate resin under standard conditions to give the desired reagent.
  • the carboxylic acid coupling reactions employing these reagents are performed at about ambient to about 45 °C, for from about 3 to 120 hours.
  • the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with CHC ⁇ and concentrating the remaining organics under reduced pressure.
  • isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure.
  • cyclic compounds and amino-substituted derivatives thereof, such as 2, employed in the reactions described above are either known in the art or can be prepared by art-recognized procedures using commercially available starting materials and reagents.
  • 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one may be prepared by cyclizing a chloromethyl amide intermediate using the procedures set forth in R. F. C. Brown et al. , Tetrahedron Letters 1971, 8, 667-670 12 and references cited therein.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by treating 18 with about 1.0 to about 2.1 equivalents of an alkyl lithium reagent, preferably sec-butyl lithium or tert-butyl lithium, in an inert diluent, such as THF, at a temperamre ranging from about -80 °C to about -60 °C for about 0.25 to about 1 hour.
  • the resulting lithium anion is then treated in situ with an excess, preferably 1.5 equivalents, of a trialkylborate, such as trimethylborate.
  • This reaction is initially conducted at - 80 °C to about -60 °C and then allowed to warm to about 0°C to about 30 °C for about 0.5 to about 3 hours.
  • the resulting methyl boronate ester is typically not isolated, but is preferably converted in situ into the pinacol ester by treating the reaction mixmre with an excess, preferably about 2.0 equivalents, of pinacol.
  • This reaction is typically conducted at ambient temperamre for about 12 to about 24 hours to afford the 2-methylphenylboronate ester, 19, in which both R 3 groups are preferably joined together to form -C(CH 3 ) 2 C(CH 3 ) r .
  • N-Boc-2-bromoaniline derivative 21 is converted into the N-Boc derivative 21 by treating 20 with about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of di-tert-butyl-dicarbonate. Typically, this reaction is conducted at a temperamre ranging from 25 °C to about 100°C for about 12 to 48 hours to afford the N-Boc-2-bromoaniline derivative 21.
  • the 2-methylphenylboronate ester, 19, and the N-Boc-2-bromoaniline derivative 21 can then be coupled to form the biphenyl derivative 22.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting 21 with about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of 19 and about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of potassium carbonate in the presence of a pallidium catalyst, preferably tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)pallidium(0).
  • a pallidium catalyst preferably tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)pallidium(0).
  • this coupling reaction is conducted in a diluent, preferably 20% water/dioxane, under an inert atmosphere at a temperature ranging from about 50 °C to about 100°C for about 6 to 24 hours.
  • Biphenyl derivative 22 is then readily converted into the 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 23 by carboxylation of the 2-methyl group, followed by cyclization to form the e-caprolactam.
  • the carboxylation reaction is typically conducted by contacting 22 with about 2.0 to about 2.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sec-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium and the like, in an inert diluent, such as THF, at a temperamre ranging from about -100°C to about -20°C for about 0.5 to 6 hours.
  • THF inert diluent
  • the resulting dianion is then treated with excess anhydrous carbon dioxide to form the carboxylate.
  • 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]aze ⁇ in-6-one, 23, is optionally N-alkylated using conventional reagents and conditions to provide a 7- alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative, 24.
  • this reaction is conducted by first contacting 23 with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride, sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like, in an inert diluent, such as DMF, THF and the like, at a temperature ranging from about -78°C to about 50°C for about 0.25 to about 6 hours.
  • a suitable base such as sodium hydride, sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like
  • an inert diluent such as DMF, THF and the like
  • the resulting anion is then treated in situ with an excess, preferably about 1.1 to about 2.0 equivalents, of an alkyl, substimted alkyl, cycloalkyl halide, etc., typically a chloride, bromide or iodide.
  • This reaction is typically conducted at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 60 °C for about 1.0 to about 48 hours to afford the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative, 24.
  • the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 24 is then oximated by contacting 24 with an excess, preferably with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like, in the presence of about 1.0 to about 2.0 equivalents of an alkyl nitrite.
  • a suitable base such as sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like
  • This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as THF and the like, at a temperature ranging from about -10°C to about 20°C for about 0.5 to about 6 hours to afford the 7-alkyl-5-oximo-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative 25.
  • an inert diluent such as THF and the like
  • this reduction reaction is conducted by hydrogenating the oxime 25 in the presence of a catalyst, such as Raney nickel.
  • a catalyst such as Raney nickel.
  • This reaction is typically conducted under about 200 psi to about 600 psi of hydrogen at a temperamre of about 70 °C to about 120°C for about 8 to 48 hours in a diluent, preferably a mixture of ethanol and ammonia (about 20:1).
  • the oxime may be reduced using 10% Pd/C and between about 30 to about 60 psi of hydrogen at a temperamre ranging from about 20 °C to about 50 °C for about 4 hours.
  • the resulting 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26 is generally purified using well known procedures, such as recrystallization and/or chromatography.
  • the 5-iodo derivative 27 of 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 23 can be prepared by first forming the 5-iodo derivative 27 of 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 23. This reaction is typically conducted as described in A. O. King et al. 13 by treating 23 with an excess, preferably about 1.2 to about 2.5 equivalents, of trimethylsilyl iodide in the presence of an excess of a trialkyamine, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TMEDA and the like, at a temperamre ranging from about -20 °C to about 0°C for about 3 to 30 minutes and then adding about 1.1 to about 2.0 equivalents of iodine (L).
  • a trialkyamine such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TMEDA and the like
  • the reaction is stirred at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 20 °C for about 2 to about 4 hours to afford 5- iodo-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 27.
  • Displacement of iodide from 27 using an alkali metal azide then affords 5- azido-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 28.
  • this reaction is conducted by contacting 27 with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of sodium azide in an inert diluent, such as DMF, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 12 to about 48 hours.
  • the azido derivative 28 is then reduced to the corresponding amino derivative 29 using conventional procedures and reagents.
  • the azido group is preferably reduced by contacting 28 with an excess, preferably with about 3 equivalents, of triphenylphosphine in a diluent, preferably a mixmre of THF and water.
  • This reduction reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 12 to 48 hours to afford 5-amino-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 29.
  • the amino group of 29 is then protected or blocked using a conventional amino blocking group.
  • compound 29 is treated with about 1.0 to about 1.1 equivalents of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in the presence of an excess, preferably about 2 to about 3 equivalents, of a trialkylamine, such as triethylamine.
  • This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as
  • THF at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C for 3 to about 24 hours to provide 5-(N-Boc-amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 30.
  • Compound 30 is then optionally N-alkylated to afford, after de-blocking of the amino group, a 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 26.
  • the N-alkylation reaction is typically conducted by treating 30 with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of an alkyl halide, a substimted alkyl halide or a cycloalkyl halide in the presence of about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as cesium carbonate and the like.
  • This reaction is generally conducted in an inert diluent, such as DMF and the like, at a temperamre ranging from about
  • alkyl, substimted alkyl and cycloalkyl halides suitable for use in this N-alkylation reaction include, by way of illustration, l-iodo-2- methylpropane, methyl bromoacetate, l-chloro-3,3-dimefhyl-2-butanone, 1- chloro-4-phenylbutane, bromomethylcyclopropane, l-bromo-2,2,2- trifluoroethane, bromocyclohexane, 1-bromohexane and the like.
  • N-Boc protecting group is then removed using conventional procedures and reagents to afford the 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 26.
  • This deblocking reaction is typically conducted by treating the N-Boc compound 30 with anhydrous hydrogen chloride in an inert diluent, such as 1,4-dioxane, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C for about 2 to about 8 hours.
  • the resulting 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro- 6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26 is generally purified using well known procedures, such as recrystallization and/or chromatography.
  • the 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones, 26, can also be prepared via an azide transfer reaction as illustrated in Scheme 9.
  • the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 24 is then reacted with an azide transfer reagent to afford 5-azido-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 31.
  • this reaction is conducted by first contacting 24 with an excess, preferably with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as lithium diisopropylamine and the like, in an inert diluent such as THF, at a temperature ranging from about -90 °C to about -60 °C for about 0.25 to about 2.0 hours.
  • the resulting anion is then treated with an excess, preferably with about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of an azide transfer reagent, such as 2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl azide (trisyl azide).
  • an azide transfer reagent such as 2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl azide (trisyl azide).
  • This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about -90°C to about -60°C for about 0.25 to about 2.0 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is then typically treated with an excess of glacial acetic acid and the mixture is allowed to warm to ambient temperature and then heated at about 35 °C to about 50 °C for about 2 to 4 hours to afford the 5-azido-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative 31.
  • Reduction of 31 as described above using conventional reagents and conditions then affords the 5-a
  • the aryl rings of 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones, 26, and similar or related compounds may be partially or fully saturated by treatment with hydrogen in the presence of a hydrogention catalyst.
  • this reaction is conducted by treating 26 with hydrogen at a pressure of about 10 to about 100 psi in the presence of a catalyst, such as rhodium on carbon.
  • This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about 20°C to about 100°C for about 12 to 96 hours in a suitable diluent, such as ethyl acetate/acetic acid (1 : 1) and the like.
  • benzodiazepine derivatives suitable for use in this invention can be prepared using conventional procedures and reagents.
  • a 2-aminobenzophenone can be readily coupled to ⁇ -(isopropylthio)-N- (benzyloxycarbonyl)glycine by first forming the acid chloride of the glycine derivative with oxayl chloride, and then coupling the acid chloride with the 2- aminobenzophenone in the presence of a base, such as 4-methy lmo ⁇ holine, to afford the 2-[ ⁇ -(isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)glycinyl]- aminobenzophenone.
  • a base such as 4-methy lmo ⁇ holine
  • 2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-ones can be readily aminated at the 3-position using conventional azide transfer reactions followed by reduction of the resulting azido group to form the corresponding amino group. The conditions for these and related reactions are described in the examples set forth below. Additionally, 2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-ones are readily alkylated at the 1 -position using conventional procedures and reagents.
  • this reaction is typically conducted by first treating the benzodiazepinone with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium tert-butoxide, potassium 1,1,1,3,3,3- hexamethyldisilazane, cesium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as DMF.
  • a base such as sodium hydride, potassium tert-butoxide, potassium 1,1,1,3,3,3- hexamethyldisilazane, cesium carbonate
  • an inert diluent such as DMF.
  • This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about -78°C to about 80 °C for about 0.5 to about 6 hours.
  • the resulting anion is then contacted with an excess, preferably about 1.1 to about 3.0 equivalents, of an alkyl halide, typically an alkyl chloride, bromide or iodide.
  • this reaction is conducted at a temperamre of about 0°C
  • 3-amino-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepines employed in this invention are typically prepared by first coupling malonic acid with a 1 ,2-phenylenediamine. Conditions for this reaction are well known in the art and are described, for example, in PCT Application WO 96-US8400 960603. Subsequent alkylation and amination using conventional procedures and reagents affords various 3-amino-l,5-bis(alkyl)-2,4- dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepines. Such procedures are described in further detail in the example set forth below.
  • the starting materials can contain a chiral center (e.g., alanine) and, when a racemic starting material is employed, the resulting product is a mixmre of R,S enantiomers.
  • a chiral isomer of the starting material can be employed and, if the reaction protocol employed does not racemize this starting material, a chiral product is obtained.
  • Such reaction protocols can involve inversion of the chiral center during synthesis.
  • the products of this invention are a mixmre of R,S enantiomers.
  • the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative.
  • chiral products can be obtained via purification techniques which separates enantiomers from a R,S mixture to provide for one or the other stereoisomer. Such techniques are well known in the art.
  • compositions When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of formula I are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula I above associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • the active compound In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about 10 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the compound of formula I above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
  • the active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound acmally administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can separated by enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face masks tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
  • Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
  • the above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • a tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below: Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
  • the components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
  • the active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixmre is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
  • Tablets each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly.
  • the solution of polyvinyl-pyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60°C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 150 mg.
  • Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
  • the active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
  • Suppositories each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water.
  • the sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • a subcutaneous formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
  • the white soft paraffin is heated until molten.
  • the liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are inco ⁇ orated and stirred until dissolved.
  • the active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed.
  • the mixture is then cooled until solid.
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Indirect techniques usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs.
  • Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier.
  • the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful in inhibiting ⁇ -amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in diagnosing and treating Alzheimer's disease in mammals including humans.
  • the compounds described herein are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems described above.
  • the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds.
  • a variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871 , 4,501,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference.
  • compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from AD in an amount sufficient to at least partially arrest further onset of the symptoms of the disease and its complications.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "therapeutically effective dose.
  • Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the degree or severity of AD in the patient, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
  • compositions are administered to a patient at risk of developing AD (determined for example by genetic screening or familial trait) in an amount sufficient to inhibit the onset of symptoms of the disease.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "prophylactically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
  • the compounds administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration.
  • the pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to 9 and most preferably from 7 and 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts.
  • the compounds described herein are also suitable for use in the administration of the compounds to a cell for diagnostic and drug discovery pu ⁇ oses. Specifically, the compounds may be used in the diagnosis of cells releasing and/or synthesizing ⁇ -amyloid peptide. In addition the compounds described herein are useful for the measurement and evaluation of the activity of other candidate drugs on the inhibition of the cellular release and/or synthesis of ⁇ -amyloid peptide.
  • ⁇ L microliter
  • Aldrich indicates that the compound or reagent used in the procedure is commercially available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. , 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233 USA; the term “Fluka” indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Fluka Chemical Co ⁇ ., 980 South 2nd Street, Ronkonkoma NY 11779 USA; the term “Lancaster” indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Lancaster Synthesis, Inc., P.O. Box 100 Windham, NH 03087 USA; the term “Sigma” indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Sigma, P.O. Box 14508, St.
  • TCI indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from TCI America, 9211 North Harborgate Street, Portland OR 97203
  • Alfa indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Johnson Matthey Catalog Company, Inc. 30 Bond Street, Ward Hill, MA 01835-0747
  • Novabiochem indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Calbiochem-Novabiochem Co ⁇ . 10933 North Torrey Pines Road, P.O.
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE A First EDC Coupling Procedure To a 1 : 1 mixture of the corresponding carboxylic acid and the corresponding amino acid ester or amide in CH 2 C1 2 at O°C was added 1.5 equivalents triethylamine, followed by 2.0 equivalents hydroxy benzotriazole monohydrate and then 1.25 equivalents of ethyl-3-(3-dimethylamino)propyl carbodiimide HCl. The reaction mixmre was stirred overnight at room temperamre and then transferred to a separatory funnel. The mixture was washed with water, saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 , IN HCl and saturated aqueous NaCl, and then dried over MgSO 4 .
  • the mixmre was diluted with EtOAc and washed with 0.1 M HCl (1 x 10 mL), saturated NaHCO 3 (1 x 10 mL), H 2 O (1 x 10 mL), and brine and dried over MgSO 4 .
  • the drying agent was removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel followed by trituration from EtOAc and hexanes.
  • the solution or mixture was diluted with EtOAc, in a 3-5 volume multiple of the initial THF volume, and washed with 0.1-1.0 M aq. HCl (1 or 2x), dilute NaHCO 3 (1 or 2x), and brine (lx). Then, the organic phase was dried over either MgSO 4 or Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated to provide the crude product, which was either further purified or utilized without further purification.
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE II-A Ester Hydrolysis to Free Acid Ester hydrolysis to the free acid was conducted by conventional methods. Below are two examples of such conventional de-esterification methods.
  • Method A To a carboxylic ester compound in a 1: 1 mixmre of CH 3 OH/H 2 O was added 2-5 equivalents of K 2 CO 3 . The mixture was heated to 50°C for 0.5 to 1.5 hours until tic showed complete reaction. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and the methanol was removed on a rotary evaporator. The pH of the remaining aqueous solution was adjusted to ⁇ 2, and ethyl acetate was added to extract the product. The organic phase was then washed with saturated aqueous NaCl and dried over MgSO 4 . The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the product.
  • Method B The amino acid ester was dissolved in dioxane/water (4: 1) to which was added LiOH ( ⁇ 2 eq.) that was dissolved in water such that the total solvent after addition was about 2: 1 dioxane: water.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred until reaction completion and the dioxane was removed under reduced pressure.
  • the residue was dissolved in water and washed with ether.
  • the layers were separated and the aqueous layer was acidified to pH 2.
  • the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the ethyl acetate extracts were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure after filtration.
  • the residue was purified by conventional methods (e.g., recrystallization).
  • Step B Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-phenylglvcine
  • Methyl ( ⁇ )-3,5-difluoromandelate was separated via preparative chiral HPLC to give a white solid having a melting point of 70-71 °C.
  • Step A To (S)-(-)-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidanone (Aldrich) in THF cooled to -
  • Step B To a solution of (S)-(-)-3-propionyl-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidanone in THF at -78°C was added LiHMDS (1.05 eq.) (Aldrich) dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at -78 °C for 30 min. and then a precooled solution of di-tert-butyl-azodicarboxylate (Aldrich) was added via a cannula. After 5 min. 2.6 eq. of acetic acid was added. The reaction mixture was then extracted with dichloromethane and the organic layer was washed with 1M potassium phosphate.
  • LiHMDS 1.05 eq.
  • Aldrich di-tert-butyl-azodicarboxylate
  • Step C To the product from Step B (1.0 g, 2.16 mM) in THF (34 mL) and water (13 mL), cooled to 0°C, was added a 30% solution of H 2 O 2 (0.734 mL, 6.4 mM) and LiOH (57 mg, 2.37 mM). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 1.5 h and then quenched with 1.5 N Na 2 SO 3 (15 mL). A saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate (48 mL) was added and the mixture was pardoned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueous layer was acidified with 10% citric acid and extracted into dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and concentrated to give the title compound (390 mg, 60%) as a colorless glass which was used without further purification.
  • Step A Ethyl 3,5-difluorophenyl- ⁇ -oxoacetate was prepared from 1- bromo-3.5-difluorobenzene (Aldrich) according to the procedure described in J.
  • Step B Ethyl 3,5-difluorophenyl- ⁇ -oxoacetate was hydrolyzed using General Procedure II-A (Method B) to afford 3,5-difluorophenyl- ⁇ -oxoacetic acid.
  • Example P Ethyl 3,5-difluorophenyl- ⁇ -oxoacetic acid.
  • N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)alanine was prepared. Specifically, to a solution of 3,4- dichloroaniline (1 equivalent) (Aldrich) in isopropanol (about 500 mL per mole of 3,4-dichloroaniline) is added water (about 0.06 mL per mL of isopropanol) and 2- chloropropionic acid (2 equivalents) (Aldrich). This mixture is warmed to 40 °C and sodium bicarbonate (0.25 equivalents) is added in successive portions before heating under reflux for 4-5 days.
  • N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanine was prepared using 3,5-difluoroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
  • Step A l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2- one was prepared according to the procedure of Ben-Ishai et al., Tetrahedron,
  • Step B l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2-one (2.0 g, 100 M%) was dissolved in DMF (30 mL) and NaH (95%, 0.17 g, 100M%) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour and then the appropriate alkyl iodide (300M%) was added and the mixture was stirred for 12 hours. The reaction was poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x). The ethyl acetate extracts were then washed with water (3x) and brine (lx).
  • Step C l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-3-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3- benzazepin-2-one (l .Og, 100M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 30% HBr/HOAc and heated to 100°C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hours at this temperature and then the reaction was cooled and rotoevaporated to yield l-amino-3-alkyl- 1,3,4, 5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2-one as the hydrobromide salt (100% yield).
  • Step A 3-Amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from ⁇ -tetralone using the methods described in Armstrong et al. Tetrahedron Letters, 1994, 35, 3239. The following compounds were as prepared by this procedure for use in the following steps:
  • Step B 3-Amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one (4.43 g, 100M%) was suspended in t-butanol (30mL) and BOC-anhydride (7.5 mL, 130M%) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 2 hours and then it was rotoevaporated to a residue which was chromatographed with 60% ethyl acetate/hexanes to yield BOC-protected 3-amino-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one in 87% yield.
  • Step C BOC-protected 3-amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2- one (1.5 g, 100M%) was dissolved in DMF (20mL) and NaH (95%, 0.13g, 100M%) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour and then the appropriate alkyl iodide (300M%) was added and stirring was continued for 12 hours. The reaction was poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x). The ethyl acetate extracts were washed with water (3x) and then brine (lx).
  • Step D The BOC-protected 3-amino-l-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (l.Og, 100M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 1 : 1 CH 2 Cl 2 /triflouroacetic acid and the mixmre was stirred for 4 hours. The reaction was then rotoevaporated to yield the 3-amino-l-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100% yield).
  • Step A 3- Amino-5-methy 1- 1 ,3,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one was prepared from 4-methyl- ⁇ -tetralone using the methods described in
  • Step B 3-Amino-5-methy 1- 1 , 3 ,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one (9.3g 100M%) was dissolved in dioxane (300mL) and the solution was chilled to 0°C. BOC-anhydride (13.89g 130M%) was added and the ice bath was removed allowing the solution to come to room temperature and stirring was continued for 16 hours. The solution was rotory evaporated to remove dioxane to provide an off white solid. This solid was recrystallized from CHCk to yield BOC- protected 3-amino-5-methyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one in 55 % yield.
  • Step C BOC-protected 3-amino-5-methyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100 M%) was dissolved in DMF (20mL) and NaH (95%, 100 M%) was added in one portion and the reaction mixmre was stirred for 1 hour. Methyl iodide (300 M%) was added and this mixmre was stirred for 12 hours. The reaction was then poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x) then backwashed with water (3x) and then brine (lx).
  • Step D BOC-protected 3-amino-l,5-dimethyl-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100 M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 1 : 1 CH 2 Cl 2 /triflouroacetic acid. The reaction mixmre was stirred for 4 hours. The reaction was then rotoevaporated to yield 3-amino-l ,5-dimethyl-l ,3,4,5- tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one (100% yield).
  • Example 6-C Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-3,3,7- trimethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (Example 6-C), the title compound was prepared.
  • Step A Following General Procedure 5-A and using N-t-Boc-5-amino-
  • Step A 3-(S)-Amino-5-oxa-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from N-Boc-serine (Bachem) and 2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (Aldrich) using the method of R. J. DeVita et al., Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry
  • Step B Following General Procedure 5-A and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
  • Step A 3-(S)-Amino-5-oxa-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from N-Boc-serine (Bachem) and 2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (Aldrich) using the method of R. J. DeVita et al. , Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry
  • Step B Following General Procedure 5-A and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 6-F Following General Procedure 5-A and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
  • Step B Synthesis of 1.3.4.7.12.12a-hexahvdropyridor2.1- b] r31benzazepin-6(2H)-one Following General Procedure G and using N-chloroacetyl-2- benzylpiperidine, the title compound was prepared.
  • Step C Synthesis of 7-Oximo-l .3.4.7.12.12a- hexahydropyrido[2.1-b]
  • Step D Synthesis of 7-Amino-1.3.4.7.12.12a- hexahydropyridor2.1-b][31benzazepin-6(2H)-one Following General Procedure A (Step C) and using 7-oximo- l,3,4,7,12,12a-hexahydropyrido[2,l-b][3]benzazepin-6(2H)-one (from Step C), the title compound was prepared.
  • Step B Synthesis of 4.5.6.7-Tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-3- benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure G and using N-chloroacetyl-3- phenylpiperidine, the title compound was prepared.
  • Step E Synthesis of l-fN'-Boc-L-Alaninyl)amino-4.5.6.7- tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-3-benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure D and using N-tert-Boc-L-alanine (Aldrich) and the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared.
  • Step F Synthesis of l-(A-L-Alaninyl)amino-4.5.6.7-tetrahydro-
  • Step A Following General Procedure 5-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one and an alkyl halide, the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
  • Step B The 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1 eq.) was dissolved in THF and isoamylnitrite (1.2 eq.) was added. The mixmre was cooled to 0°C in an ice bath. NaHMDS (1.1 eq., 1M in THF) was added dropwise. After stirring for 1 hour or until the reaction was complete, the mixmre was concentrated then acidified with IN HCl and extracted with EtOAc. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield a crude product which was purified by silica gel chromatography.
  • Step C The resulting oxime was dissolved in EtOH/NH 3 (20: 1) and hydrogenated in a bomb using Raney nickel and hydrogen (500 psi) at 100°C for 10 hours. The resulting mixmre was filtered and concentrated to provide an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography to yield the title compound.
  • the oxime isolated above (0.99 g, 3.92 mmol) was hydrogenated in a Parr apparatus at 35 psi over 10 % Pd/C (0.46 g) in 3 A ethanol. After 32 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of celite, the filtrate evaporated to a foam and treated with a saturated solution of HCl (g) in Et 2 O. The resulting colorless solid was filtered, rinsed with cold Et 2 O and vacuum dried to give 0.66 g (61 %) of the title compound.
  • Boc-L-Alanine (0.429 g, 2.26 mmol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.305 g, 2.26 mmol). and 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (0.45 g, 1.89 mmol) (Example 7-A).
  • the temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.449 g, 2.26 mmol) (Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N 2 .
  • the reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H 2 O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO 3 , brine and dried over Na 2 SO4.
  • the diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA/heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
  • Boc-L-Valine (0.656 g, 3.02 mmol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.408, 3.02 mmol), Dipea (1.05 ml, 6.05 mmol) and 5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (0.75 g, 2.75 mmol)(Example 7-A). The temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.601 g, 3.02 mmol)(Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N 2 .
  • the reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H 2 O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO 3 , brine and dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • the diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA/heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
  • Step B Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(L-Valinyl)-amino-7-methyl-
  • Boc-L-tert-Leucine (0.698 g, 3.02 mmol) (Fluka) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.408, 3.02 mmol), Dipea (1.05 ml, 6.05 mmol) and 5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (0.75 g, 2.75 mmol)(Example 7-A). The temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.601 g, 3.02 mmol) (Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N 2 .
  • the reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H 2 O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO 3 , brine and dried over Na 2 SO .
  • the diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
  • Step B Synthesis of 5-Azido-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6- one
  • the iodide isolate above was dissolved in DMF and treated with 1.2 equivalents of NaN 3 . After stirring 17 h at 23 °C the mixture was diluted with
  • Example 7-E 6-one (0.2g, 0.617 mmol) (Example 7-E) in DMF was treated with Cs 2 CO 3 (0.22 g,
  • Example 7-E (1.03. 3.08 mmol) (Example 7-E) in DMF was treated with Cs 2 CO 3 (1.10 g, 3.39 mmol) and warmed to 60°C. To the reaction mixture was added bromomethyl acetate (0.321 ml. 3.39 mmol) (Aldrich) and stirring continued for 17 h. After cooling to 23 °C the mixture was diluted with CH 2 CL, washed with several portions of brine and dried over Na 2 SO 4 . The title compound was purified by chromatography (SiO 2 , CHC1J.
  • Step A Following General Procedure D and using N-t-Boc-L-alanine and
  • Step B Following General Procedure 8-N and using the N-t-Boc-L- alaninyl-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared.
  • Other substituted N-t-Boc-L-alaninyl-5-amino-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones can also be prepared by this procedure.
  • Step A Following General Procedure D and using N-t-Boc-L-valine and
  • Step B Following General Procedure 8-N and using the N-t-Boc-L- valinyl-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared.
  • Other substituted N-t-Boc-L-valinyl-5-amino-7-mefhyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones can also be prepared by this procedure.
  • Step 1 2-Bromo-5-fluorotoluene was stirred in THF at -78C.
  • s-BuLi (1.05 eq., 1.3 M in cyclohexane) was slowly added and the mixture was stirred for 45 minutes.
  • Trimethylborate ( 1.5 eq) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature. After sti ⁇ ing for 1 hour, pinacol (2 eq.) was added.
  • Step 2 2-Bromoaniline (1 eq.) and di-t-butyl-dicarbonate (1.1 eq.) were stirred at 80 °C for 20 hours. The resulting mixture was allowed to cool and was directly distilled using house vacuum to provide N-t-Boc-2-bromoaniline.
  • Step 3 N-t-Boc-2-bromoaniline (Step 2, 1 eq.), the arylboronate ester (Step 1, 1.1 eq.), K 2 CO 3 (1.1 eq.) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.02 eq) were stirred in 20% water/dioxane under nitrogen. The solution was heated at reflux for 10 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool then was concentrated. The resulting residue was partitioned between water and chloroform. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography using 1 : 1 CH 2 CL/hexanes.
  • Step 4 Following General Procedure 7-B and using the substituted biphenyl from step 3, the 9-fluoro-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
  • Step 5 9-Fluoro-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1 eq., Step 4), cesium carbonate (1.1 eq., Aldrich) and methyl iodide (1.1 eq., Aldrich) were stirred in dry DMF at ambient temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide a residue which was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography to 9-fluoro-7-mefhyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one.
  • Step 6 Following General Procedure 7-A, Step B and 9-fluoro-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one from Step 5, 5-amino-9-fluoro-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
  • Step 7 Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-9- fluoro-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one from Step 6, the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 7-S Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-7- cyclopropylmethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-L), the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 7-S
  • Example 7-L Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-7- cyclopropylmethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-L), the title compound was prepared.
  • Step A Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6FI- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron
  • Step B Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-7- hexyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 7-J Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-10-fluoro-7- mefhyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (as prepared in Example T ⁇ -Q), the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 7-O Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using the 5-amino-9-fluoro-7- methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (as prepared in Example 7-O), the title compound was prepared.
  • Example 7-A The 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (Example 7-A) was dissolved in a 1 :1 mixture of EtOAc/HOAc. 5% Rh/C was added and the mixture was stirred at 60 °C under 60 psi of hydrogen. After 3 days, the mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to provide an oil which was purified by SCX-cation exchange chromatography to yield the title compound.
  • Desired enantiomer 1 retention time of 9.97 minutes.
  • Undesired enantiomer 2 retention time of 8.62 minutes.
  • Step C Synthesis of l -Chloromethylacetyl-8-phenyl-l .2.3.4- tetrahvdroquinoline
  • the product from Step B (1.0 g. 4.78 mmol) was dissolved in CH 2 CL (20 mL)/ H 2 O (20 mL) and treated with NaHCO 3 (0.602 g, 7.18 mmol) followed by chloroacetyl chloride (0.478 ml, 5.26 mmol). After stirring for 17 h at 23°C, the reaction was diluted with CH 2 CL, washed with saturated NaHCO 3 , dried over
  • Step E Synthesis of 9-Oximo-5.6-Dihydro-4H-quino[8.1 - ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one
  • the product from Step D (0.490 g, 1.97 mmol) was dissolved in THF and butyl nitrite (0.46 mL, 3.93 mmol) and treated with KHMDS (0.5 M. 4.52 mL,
  • Step F Synthesis of 9-Amino-5.6-Dihydro-4H-quino[8.1- ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one
  • the product from Step E (0.360 g, 1.29 mmol) was hydrogenated over
  • Step A Synthesis of 9-(N'-Boc-L-Alaninyl)amino-5.6-Dihvdro-4H- quino[8.1-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one Following General Procedure D and using N-Boc -Alanine (Aldrich) and 9-amino-5,6-dihydro-4H-quino[8, l-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one (from
  • Example 7-AC the title compound was prepared.
  • Step B Synthesis of 9-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-5.6-dihydro-4H- quinof8. l-ab][31benzazepin-8(9H)-one Hydrochloride Following General Procedure E and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-A N- 1 -Methy lation of Benzodiazepines A solution of benzodiazepine (1 eq.) in DMF (0.1 M concentration) at 0°C was treated with potassium tert-butoxide (1.0 eq., 1.0 M solution in THF). After stirring for 30 minutes at 0°C, iodomethane (1.3 eq.) was added and stirring continued for 25 minutes. The mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with water and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated. The crude product was then either purified by trituration with 1 : 1 ether/hexanes or chromatographed via HPLC using ethyl acetate/hexanes as the eluent.
  • the HBr salt was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 M K 2 CO 3 .
  • the aqueous layer was back-extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organics were washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and concentrated.
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-C Boc Removal Procedure A solution of Boc-protected amine (1 eq.) in methylene chloride (0.15 M concentration) was cooled to 0°C and treated with trifluoroacetic acid (30 eq.). After 10 minutes at 0°C, the cooling bath was removed and stirring continued at ambient for 20 minutes to 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove excess trifluoroacetic acid. The residue was dissolved in methylene chloride and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 or 1 M K 2 CO 3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO , filtered, and concentrated.
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-F Azido Group Reduction The azido group was reduced to the corresponding primary amine using the procedure described in John W. Butcher et al., Tet. Lett., 37, 6685-6688 (1996). GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-G

Landscapes

  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. Also disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound which inhibits β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis as well as methods for treating Alzheimer's disease both prophylactically and therapeutically with such pharmaceutical compositions.

Description

COMPOUNDS FOR INHIBITING BETA-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.
60/ , , which was converted pursuant to 37 C.F.R. § 1.53(b) from U.S.
Patent Application No. 09/102,728, filed June 22, 1998; the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. 5
References
The following publications, patents and patent applications are cited in this application as superscript numbers:
10 ' Glenner, et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. (1984)
120:885-890.
2 U.S. Patent No. 4,666,829, issued May 19, 1987, to G. G. Glenner et al., entitled "Polypeptide Marker for Alzheimer's
15 Disease and Its Use for Diagnosis."
3 Selkoe, Neuron. (1991) 6:487-498.
4 Goate , et al . , Nature ( 1990) 349 : 704-706. 20 5 Chartier Harlan, et al . , Nature ( 1989) 353 : 844-846.
6 Murrell, et al. , Science (1991) 254:97-99.
7 Mullan, et al., Nature Genet. (1992) 1:345-347.
8 Schenk, et al., International Patent Application Publication No. WO 94/10569, "Methods and Compositions for the Detection of Soluble β- Amyloid Peptide ", published 11 May 1994.
9 Selkoe, Scientific American, "Amyoid Protein and Alzheimer's Disease", pp. 2-8, November, 1991.
10 Yates et al. , U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859.
11 Tetrahedron Letters 1993, 34(48), 7685.
R. F. C. Brown et al. , Tetrahedron Letters 1971, 8, 667-670.
13 A. O. King et al., J. Org. Chem. 1993, 58, 3384-3386.
14 U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/019,790, filed June
14, 1996.
15 R. D. Clark et al. , Tetrahedron 1993, 49(7), 1351-1356.
16 Citron, et al. , Nature (1992) 360:672-674.
P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327.
18 Hansen, et al. , J. Immun. Meth.(\989) 119:203-210.
19 Games et al. , Nature (1995) 373:523-527.
20 Johnson-Wood et al., PNAS USA (1997) 94: 1550-1555.
All of the above publications, patents and patent applications are herein incoφorated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incoφorated by reference in its entirety. State of the Art
Alzheimer's Disease (AD) is a degenerative brain disorder characterized clinically by progressive loss of memory, cognition, reasoning, judgment and emotional stability that gradually leads to profound mental deterioration and ultimately death. AD is a very common cause of progressive mental failure
(dementia) in aged humans and is believed to represent the fourth most common medical cause of death in the United States. AD has been observed in races and ethnic groups worldwide and presents a major present and future public health problem. The disease is currently estimated to affect about two to three million individuals in the United States alone. AD is at present incurable. No treatment that effectively prevents AD or reverses its symptoms and course is currently known.
The brains of individuals with AD exhibit characteristic lesions termed senile (or amyloid) plaques, amyloid angiopathy (amyloid deposits in blood vessels) and neurofibrillary tangles. Large numbers of these lesions, particularly amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles, are generally found in several areas of the human brain important for memory and cognitive function in patients with AD. Smaller numbers of these lesions in a more restrictive anatomical distribution are also found in the brains of most aged humans who do not have clinical AD. Amyloid plaques and amyloid angiopathy also characterize the brains of individuals with Trisomy 21 (Down's Syndrome) and Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage with Amyloidosis of the Dutch Type (HCHWA-D). At present, a definitive diagnosis of AD usually requires observing the aforementioned lesions in the brain tissue of patients who have died with the disease or, rarely, in small biopsied samples of brain tissue taken during an invasive neurosurgical procedure.
The principal chemical constituent of the amyloid plaques and vascular amyloid deposits (amyloid angiopathy) characteristic of AD and the other disorders mentioned above is an approximately 4.2 kilodalton (kD) protein of about 39-43 amino acids designated the β-amyloid peptide (βAP) or sometimes Aβ, AβP or β/A4. β-Amyloid peptide was first purified and a partial amino acid sequence was provided by Glenner, et al.1 The isolation procedure and the sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,666,8292.
Molecular biological and protein chemical analyzes have shown that the β-amyloid peptide is a small fragment of a much larger precursor protein termed the amyloid precursor protein (APP), that is normally produced by cells in many tissues of various animals, including humans. Knowledge of the structure of the gene encoding APP has demonstrated that β-amyloid peptide arises as a peptide fragment that is cleaved from APP by protease enzyme(s). The precise biochemical mechanism by which the β-amyloid peptide fragment is cleaved from APP and subsequently deposited as amyloid plaques in the cerebral tissue and in the walls of the cerebral and meningeal blood vessels is currently unknown.
Several lines of evidence indicate that progressive cerebral deposition of β-amyloid peptide plays a seminal role in the pathogenesis of AD and can precede cognitive symptoms by years or decades. See, for example, Selkoe3. The most important line of evidence is the discovery that missense DNA mutations at amino acid 717 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP can be found in affected members but not unaffected members of several families with a genetically determined (familial) form of AD (Goate, et al.4; Chartier Harlan, et al.5; and Murrell, et al.6) and is referred to as the Swedish variant. A double mutation changing lysine595-methionine596 to asparagine595-leucine596 (with reference to the 695 isoform) found in a Swedish family was reported in 1992 (Mullan, et al.7). Genetic linkage analyses have demonstrated that these mutations, as well as certain other mutations in the APP gene, are the specific molecular cause of AD in the affected members of such families. In addition, a mutation at amino acid 693 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP has been identified as the cause of the β-amyloid peptide deposition disease, HCHWA-D, and a change from alanine to glycine at amino acid 692 appears to cause a phenotype that resembles AD is some patients but HCHWA-D in others. The discovery of these and other mutations in APP in genetically based cases of AD prove that alteration of APP and subsequent deposition of its β-amyloid peptide fragment can cause AD.
Despite the progress which has been made in understanding the underlying mechanisms of AD and other β-amyloid peptide related diseases, there remains a need to develop methods and compositions for treatment of the disease(s). Ideally, the treatment methods would advantageously be based on drugs which are capable of inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in vivo.
Compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in vivo are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application No. 08/996,422, filed December
22, 1997 (Attorney Docket No. 002010-062) and entitled "Cycloalkyl, Lactam, Lactone and Related Compounds, Pharmaceutical Compositions Comprising Same, and Methods for Inhibiting β-Amyloid Peptide Release, and/or its Synthesis by Use of Such Compounds," the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. The present invention is directed to deoxy derivatives of such compounds.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention is directed to the discovery of a class of compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis and, therefore, are useful in the prevention of AD in patients susceptible to AD and/or in the treatment of patients with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in their condition.
Accordingly, in one of its composition aspects, the present invention provides compounds of formula I:
wherein
W is a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
■CH— C — NH- -(CH) — NH- or
O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2')a-NH-; R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkenyl, substimted alkynyl, substimted cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substimted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S O ;
Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to about 6; / is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
This invention also provides for novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the formula I above.
Additionally, in one of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of foπnula I above effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of β-amyloid peptide.
Because the in vivo generation of β-amyloid peptide is associated with the pathogenesis of AD8-9, the compounds of formula I can also be employed in conjunction with a pharmaceutical composition to prophylactically and/or therapeutically prevent and/or treat AD. Accordingly, in another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a prophylactic method for preventing the onset of AD in a patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixmre of compounds of formula I above.
In yet another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a therapeutic method for treating a patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixmre of compounds of formula I above.
In formula I above, rings A and B may be the same or different and are preferably independently selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic. More preferably, rings A and B are independently selected from the group consisting of aryl and cycloalkyl. Still more preferably, rings A and B are independently aryl.
Particularly preferred A and B rings include, by way of example, phenyl, substimted phenyl, including fluoro-substimted phenyl, cyclohexyl and the like.
Preferred C rings include, by way of example, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, moφholino and the like.
When m is zero (i.e., there is a covalent bond from R1 to NH), R1 is preferably aryl (including substituted aryl) or heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl). In this embodiment, further preferred R1 groups include
(a) phenyl, (b) a substituted phenyl group of the formula:
Rb wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring wherein the heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring contains from 3 to 8 atoms of which from 1 to 3 are heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur;
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substimted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl,
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group, and
(g) alkyl.
When m is zero, particularly preferred substimted phenyl R1 groups include mono-, di- and tri-substituted phenyl groups including 3,5-disubstituted phenyls such as 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl, etc.; 3,4-disubstituted phenyls such as 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl, 3, 4-methy lenedioxyphenyl, etc.; 4-substituted phenyls such as 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4- ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-iodophenyl, 4-(phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, 4-(l- ethoxy)ethy lphenyl, etc., 3,4,5-trisubsituted phenyls such as 3,4,5- trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trichlorophenyl, etc.
Specific R1 groups for when m is zero include 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 4- phenylfurazan-3-yl, and the like.
When m is zero, other preferred R1 substituents include, by way of example, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, 5- indolyl, phenyl, and the like.
When m is one, preferred R1 groups include unsubstituted aryl groups such as phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, etc. ; substimted aryl groups such as monosubstimted phenyls (preferably substiments at 3 or 5 positions); disubstituted phenyls (preferably substituents at 3 and 5 positions); and trisubstituted phenyls (preferably substituents at the 3,4,5 positions). Preferably, the substituted phenyl groups do not include more than 3 substituents. Examples of substimted phenyls include, for instance, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2- bromophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2-methy lphenyl, 2- methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethy lphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methy lphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl,
4-methoxy phenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl, 4-butoxyphenyl, 4-/sø-propy lphenyl, 4- phenoxyphenyl, 4-trifluoromethy lphenyl, 4-hydroxymethy lphenyl, 3- methoxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 3- chlorophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 3-phenoxyphenyl, 3-thiomethoxyphenyl, 3- methylphenyl, 3 -trifluoromethy lphenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl,
2, 4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5- dimethoxyphenyl, 2, 4-dichlorophenyl, 2,4-difluorophenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl, 3,4,5-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl,
2,3,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-3- trifluoromethy lphenyl , 4-fluoro-2-trifluoromethy lphenyl , 2-fluoro-4- trifluoromethy lphenyl, 4-benzyloxyphenyl, 2-chloro-6-fluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-6- chlorophenyl, 2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 4-phenylphenyl and 2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl.
When m is one, other preferred R1 groups include, by way of example, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4-phenyl-n-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wo-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, iso- valeryl, n-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1- enyl, cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclobutyl, - CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-cyclopentyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopentyl, pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, fluoropyridyls (including 5-fluoropyrid-3-yl), chloropyridyls (including 5- chloropyrid-3-yl), thien-2-yl, thien-3-yl, benzothiazol-4-yl, 2-phenylbenzoxazol-
5-yl, furan-2-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, thionaphthen-2-yl, thionaphthen-3-yl, thionaphthen-4-yl, 2-chlorothiophen-5-yl, 3-methylisoxazol-5-yl, 2-(thiophenyl)thien-5-yl, 6-methoxythionaphthen-2-yl, 3-phenyl-l ,2,4- thiooxadiazol-5-yl, 2-phenyloxazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, l-phenyl-tetraol-5-yl, allyl, 2-(cyclohexyl)ethyl, (CH3)2CH = CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)-, φC(O)CH2-, thien-2-yl- methyl, 2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl, 3-(thien-2-yl)-n-propyl, 2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4- methoxyphenyl)ethyl, norboran-2-yl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (2- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4- hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methylphenyl)methyl, (4- fluorophenyl)methyl, (4-fluorophenoxy)methyl, (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, (4- chlorophenyl)methyl, (2-chlorophenyl)methyl, (l-phenyl)ethyl, (l-ip- chloropheny l)ethy 1 , ( 1 -trifluoromethy l)ethy 1 , (4-methoxypheny l)ethyl , CH3OC(O)CH2-, benzylthiomethyl, 5-(methoxycarbonyl)-n-pentyl, 3- (methoxycarbonyl)-n-propyl, indan-2-yl, (2-methylbenzofuran-3-yl), methoxymethyl, CH3CH=CH-, CH3CH2CH=CH-, (4-chlorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-fluorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-methoxyphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-(fluorophenyl)-
NHC(O)CH2-, 1-phenyl-n-butyl, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, (CH3)2NC(O)CH2-, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, methylcarbonylmethyl, (2,4-dimethylphenyl)C(O)CH2- , 4-methoxyphenyl-C(O)CH2-, phenyl-C(O)CH2-, CH3C(O)N(φ)-, ethenyl, methylthiomethyl, (CH3)3CNHC(O)CH2-, 4-fluorophenyl-C(O)CH2-, diphenylmethyl, phenoxymethyl, 3, 4-methy lenedioxyphenyl-CH2-, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, (CH3)3COC(O)NHCH2-, trαns-styryl, H2NC(O)CH2CH2-, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl-C(O)CH2, φC(O)NHCH(φ)CH2-, mesityl, CH3CH( = NHOH)CH2-, 4-CH3-φ-NHC(O)CH2CH2-, φC(O)CH(φ)CHr, (CH3)2CHC(O)NHCH(φ)-, CH3CH2OCH2-, CH3OC(O)CH(CH3)(CH2)3-, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl, 2-CH3-benzofuran-3-yl, 2-(2,4- dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, φSO2CH2-, 3-cyclohexyl-n-propyl, CF3CH2CH2CH2- and N-pyrrolidinyl.
When present, R2 is preferably selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
Each R2' is preferably (and independently) selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
Particularly preferred R2 and R2' substiments (when R2' is other than hydrogen) include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, Λrø-propyl, n- butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6- fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, iso- but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2 -cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, /?-(phenyl)phenyl, o- fluorophenyl, nz-fluorophenyl, ^-fluorophenyl, nz-methoxyphenyl, p- methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, nz-hydroxybenzyl, -hydroxybenzyl, p- nitrobenzyl, nz-trifluoromethy lphenyl, /?-(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, p- (CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, ?-(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, p-(N- moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3- tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2- thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, -2-methylcyclopentyl, -cyclohex-2-enyl, - CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3) = CH2, - CH2CH = CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -
CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl (e.g., 2-pyridyl, 3- pyridyl and 4-pyridyl), pyridyl (2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl and 4-pyridyl), -CH2- naphthyl (e.g. , 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl), -CH2-(N-moφholino), p-(N- moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6- methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl, thien-3-yl, and the like. Preferably, R2' is methyl.
Preferably, R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl. In another preferred embodiment, R3 is alkyl, substimted alkyl or aryl. More preferably, R3 is alkyl.
Particularly preferred R3 substituents include, by way of example, hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3- dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
When present, R4 is preferably alkyl or substimted alkyl. R5 is preferably alkyl; substituted alkyl; phenyl; substituted phenyl, such as 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl and the like; cycloalkyl, such as cyclohexyl and the like; or heteroaryl or heterocyclic, such as 1-piperdinyl, 2-pyridyl, 2-thiazyl, 2-thienyl and the like.
Preferably, / is 0 or 1. More preferably, / is 0.
When Y is the group -(CHR2')a-NH-, the integer a is preferably 2, 3 or 4, more preferably 2 or 4, and still more preferably a is equal to 2. In a preferred embodiment, Y has the formula -CHR2 -CH2-NH-, where R2' is as defined herein, including the described preferred embodiments.
In one preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic group of the formula:
wherein each R6 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -
SO-aryl,
-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2- heteroaryl; each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, - SO-aryl,
-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2- heteroaryl; R8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; p is an integer from 0 to 4; q is an integer from 0 to 4.
Preferably, R6 and R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, alkyl, substimted alkyl, amino, substimted amino, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano. halo, nitro, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy. More preferably, when present, R6 and R7 are fluoro.
R8 is preferably selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl and substimted cycloalkyl. More preferably, R8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
Particularly preferred R8 substiments include, by way of example, hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3- dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, cyclohexyl, and the like. In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic group of the formula:
wherein R6, R7, and p are as defined herein and r is an integer from 0 to 3.
In still another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic group of the formula:
wherein R6 and p are as defined herein.
In yet another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6 and p are as defined herein.
In still another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8 and p are as defined herein; and each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; and g is an integer from 0 to 2.
When present, R9 is preferably alkyl or substimted alkyl.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8, R9, g and p are as defined herein.
In yet another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8, R9, g and /? are as defined herein.
In still another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, each R8 and p are as defined herein.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
(R9)c wherein R6, each R8, R9, g and /? are as defined herein.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8 and p are as defined herein; and
R10 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, substimted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R10 and p are as defined herein; and
D-E is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, alkenylene, substimted alkylene, substimted alkenylene and -N=CH-.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8, R9, g and p are as defined herein; and Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2-.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8 and p are as defined herein.
In another preferred embodiment of this invention, W is a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R8 is as defined herein. In the above formulae, preferably each R6 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkoxy and halo; each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkoxy and halo; each R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; and g, p, q and r are 0 or 1. More preferably, g, p, q and r are 0.
Compounds of this invention include, by way of example, the following:
i.e. , 5S-[N'-(2S-hydroxy-3-methylbutyryl)-2S-aminoprop-l-yl]amino-7- methy 1-5 , 7-dihydro-6H-dibenz [b , d] azepin-6-one .
The products of this invention include mixtures of R,S enantiomers at any stereochemical center. Preferably, however, when a chiral product is desired, the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative. In the formulas set forth herein, a mixture of R,S enantiomers at the stereochemical center is sometimes indicated by a squiggly line as per convention. Othertimes, no stereochemical designation is made at the stereochemical center and this also infers that a mixture of enantiomers is present.
Also included within the scope of this invention are prodrugs of the compounds of formula I above including acylated forms of alcohols and thiols, aminals of one or more amines, and the like. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As above, this invention relates to compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. However, prior to describing this invention in further detail, the following terms will first be defined.
Definitions
The term "β-amyloid peptide" refers to a 39-43 amino acid peptide having a molecular weight of about 4.2 kD, which peptide is substantially homologous to the form of the protein described by Glenner, et al.1 including mutations and post-translational modifications of the normal β-amyloid peptide. In whatever form, the β-amyloid peptide is an approximate 39-43 amino acid fragment of a large membrane-spanning glycoprotein, referred to as the β-amyloid precursor protein (APP). Its 43-amino acid sequence is:
1
Asp Ala Glu Phe Arg His Asp Ser Gly Tyr 11
Glu Val His His Gin Lys Leu Val Phe Phe
21
Ala Glu Asp Val Gly Ser Asn Lys Gly Ala
31
He He Gly Leu Met Val Gly Gly Val Val
41 He Ala Thr (SEQ ID NO: 1)
or a sequence which is substantially homologous thereto.
"Alkyl" refers to monovalent alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wø-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, n- hexyl, and the like. "Substimted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 5 substituents,. and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, - SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl.
"Alkylene" refers to divalent alkylene groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-) and the like.
"Substimted alkylene" refers to an alkylene group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substimted alkylene groups include those where 2 substiments on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group. Preferably such fused cycloalkyl groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures. "Alkenylene" refers to divalent alkenylene groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (-CH=CH-), the propenylene isomers (e.g. , -CH2CH=CH- and -C(CH3)=CH-) and the like.
"Substimted alkenylene" refers to an alkenylene group, preferably of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substimted alkylene groups include those where 2 substiments on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group.
"Alkaryl" refers to -alkylene-aryl groups preferably having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms in the alkylene moiety and from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the aryl moiety. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
"Alkoxy" refers to the group "alkyl-O-" . Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, /sø-propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, 5ec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
"Substimted alkoxy" refers to the group "substimted alkyl-O-" where substimted alkyl is as defined above.
"Alkylalkoxy" refers to the group "-alkylene-O-alkyl" which includes by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH2OCH3), ethylenemethoxy (-CH2CH2OCH3), n-propylene-Λrø-propoxy (-CH2CH2CH2OCH(CH3)2), methylene-t-butoxy (-CH2-O-C(CH3)3) and the like.
"Alkylthioalkoxy" refers to the group "-alkylene-S-alkyl" which includes by way of example, methylenethiomethoxy (-CH2SCH3), ethylenethiomethoxy
(-CH2CH2SCH3) , n-propy lene-thio-wø-propoxy (-CH2CH2CH2SCH(CH3)2) , methylenethio-t-butoxy (-CH2SC(CH3)3) and the like.
"Alkenyl" refers to alkenyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH = CH2), n-propenyl (-CH2CH=CH2), /sσ-propenyl (- C(CH3) = CH2), and the like.
"Substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl.
"Alkynyl" refers to alkynyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation. Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C≡CH), propargyl (-CH2C≡CH) and the like.
"Substimted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, substimted cycloalkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, nitro -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl.
"Acyl" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substimted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic -C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Acylamino" refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group, wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Amino" refers to the group -NH2.
"Substimted amino" refers to the group -N(R)2 where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group. When both R groups are hydrogen, -N(R)2 is an amino group. Examples of substituted amino groups include, by way of illustration, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and the like. The term "amino-blocking group" or "amino-protecting group" refers to any group which, when bound to an amino group, prevents undesired reactions from occurring at the amino group and which may be removed by conventional chemical and/or enzymatic procedures to reestablish the amino group. Any known amino-blocking group may be used in this invention. Typically, the amino-blocking group is selected so as to render the resulting blocked-amino group unreactive to the particular reagents and reaction conditions employed in a subsequent pre -determined chemical reaction or series of reactions. After completion of the reaction(s), the amino-blocking group is selectively removed to regenerate the amino group. Examples of suitable amino-blocking groups include, by way of illustration, tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc), benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz), acetyl, l-(l'-adamantyl)-l-methylethoxycarbonyl (Acm), allyloxycarbonyl (Aloe), benzyloxymethyl (Bom), 2- -biphenylisopropyloxycarbonyl (Bpoc), tert- butyldimethylsilyl (Bsi), benzoyl (Bz), benzyl (Bn), 9-fluorenyl- methyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), 4-methy lbenzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, 2- nitrophenylsulfenyl (Nps), 3-nitro-2-pyridinesulfenyl (NPys), trifluoroacetyl (Tfa), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzyl (Tmob), trityl (Trt), and the like. If desired, amino-blocking groups covalently attached to a solid support may also be employed.
"Aminoacyl" refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aminoacyloxy" refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. "Acyloxy" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl-C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)O-, heteroaryl- C(O)O-, and heterocyclic-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino. alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino. thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl. -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
"Aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substimted aryl groups as also defined above.
"Carboxyalkyl" refers to the groups "-C(O)Oalkyl" and "-C(O)O- substimted alkyl" where alkyl is as defined above.
"Cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 12 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
"Substimted cycloalkyl" refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3) substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substimted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, - SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl.
"Cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation.
Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
"Substituted cycloalkenyl" refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro,
-SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2- substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl.
"Halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either fluoro or chloro. "Heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substimted with 1 to 5 substiments selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkyl, substimted alkoxy, substimted alkenyl, substimted alkynyl, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -
SO-aryl,
-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring
(e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g. , indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
"Heteroaryloxy" refers to the group "-O-heteroaryl".
"Heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" refers to a monovalent saturated or unsamrated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substimted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substimted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, substimted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2- substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include moφholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
Examples of heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole. purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, moφholino, piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heterocycles.
"Heterocyclooxy" refers to the group "-O-heterocycle".
"Keto" or "oxo" refers to the group " = O".
"Oxyacylamino" refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Thiol" refers to the group -SH.
"Thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-alkyl.
"Substimted thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl. "Thioaryloxy" refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
"Thioheteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substimted aryl groups as also defined above.
"Thioketo" refers to the group " = S".
The term "5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one" refers to a polycyclic e-caprolactam ring system having the formula:
wherein, for nomenclamre puφoses, the atoms and bonds are numbered and lettered, respectively, as shown.
The term "5,6-dihydro-4H-quino[8,l-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one" refers to a polycyclic e-caprolactam ring system having the formula:
wherein, for nomenclamre puφoses, the atoms and bonds are numbered and lettered, respectively, as shown. The term " 1 ,3,4,7, 12, 12a-hexahydropyrido[2, l-b][3]benzazepin-6(2H)- one" refers to a polycyclic e-caprolactam ring system having the formula:
wherein, for nomenclamre puφoses, the atoms and bonds are numbered and lettered, respectively, as shown.
The term "4,5,6 , 7-tetrahy dro-3 , 7-methano-3H-3-benzazonin-2( 1 H)-one" refers to a polycyclic e-caprolactam ring system having the foπnula:
wherein, for nomenclamre puφoses, the atoms and bonds are numbered and lettered, respectively, as shown.
As to any of the above groups which contain 1 or more substiments, it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substimtion or substimtion patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of formula I which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like can be used as the pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
The term "protecting group" or "blocking group" refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, carboxyl groups or other protectable functional group of the compounds which prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the unprotected functional group. The particular removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substiments such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t- butyl-diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild hydrolysis conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
Compound Preparation When m and n are one, the compounds of foπnula I are readily prepared by conventional reductive amination, followed by acylation as illustrated in Scheme 1. Scheme 1
Acylation
As shown in Scheme 1 , a protected aldehyde or ketone J (where B1 is a protecting group and R2' and a are as defined herein) can be coupled with an amine compound, such as 2 (where R6, R7, R8, p and q are as defined herein), by conventional reductive amination to provide, after deprotection, intermediate 3. In Scheme 1 , amine 2 is merely representative and those skilled in the art will recognize that amino derivatives of any of the other ring systems described herein may be employed in this reaction. Typically, this reaction is conducted by contacting amine 2 with an excess of 1, preferably with 1.1 to 2 equivalents of J., and an excess, preferably 1.1 to 1.5 equivalents, of a reducing agent, such as sodium cyanoborohydride. Generally, this reaction is conducted in an essentially inert diluent, such as methanol, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C, preferably at ambient temperamre, for about 0.5 to 3 hours. Removal of the amine protecting group using conventional procedures and reagents then affords intermediate 3.
Intermediate 3 can then be acylated or coupled with a carboxylic acid, e.g. , 4 (where R1, T, X' and X" are as defined herein), to provide compound 5. This reaction is typically conducted using conventional coupling reagents and procedures and at least a stoichiometric amount of intermediate 3 and carboxylic acid 4. For example, well known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides with or without the use of well known additives such as N-hydroxysuccinimide, 1- hydroxy benzotriazole, etc. can be used to facilitate coupling. The reaction is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like. Alternatively, the acid halide of compound 4 can be employed in reaction (1) and, when so employed, it is typically employed in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N- methylmoφholine and the like.
Alternatively, compound 5 can be prepared by reductive amination of a compound of formula 6:
T R1
where R1, R2 , T, X', X" and a are as defined herein, with amine 2, using conventional reagents and procedures.
Compounds of formula 1, where n is 1 and m is 0, can similarly be prepared by reductive amination of an intermediate of formula 7:
R2' O
R 1 — N - -C
-(C H )a_r B2 R2'
7
where B2 is a suitable amine protecting group and R1 , R2 and a are as defined herein, with amine 2, followed by deprotection using conventional procedures.
When n is two and both of Y are represented by the formula -(CHR2 )a- NH-, the compounds of formula I can be prepared by further reductive alkylation of intermediate 3 with, for example, compound 6 or 7, using conventional reagents and procedures. Alternatively, intermediate 3 can be reductively alkylated with protected aldehyde or ketone 1 and the resulting intermediate deprotected and acylated using procedures similar to those described above.
Compounds in which n is two and one of Y is represented by the formula -(CHR2')a-NH- and the other Y is represented by the formula -CHR2-C(O)NH- can be prepared by coupling intermediate 3 with a protected carboxylic acid of formula 8:
8
where R1, R2, Z and m are as defined herein, using conventional coupling reagents and procedures such as those described above, to afford compounds of foπnula I.
Alternatively, compounds of formula I can be prepared by first coupling an amine, such as 2, with a protected carboxylic acid 9, and then, after deprotection, reductively alkylating the resulting intermediate 10 as illustrated in Scheme 2.
Reductive Alkylation, 6 or 7 or
1 ) Reductive Alkylation, 1
2) Deprotection
3) Acylation, 4
Compound of Formula I
When n is 2, the aldehyde, ketone or carboxylic acid units may also be coupled together prior to reaction with an amine using the reductive amination or acylation procedures described above, as appropriate. The resulting intermediate is then coupled to the amine, such as 2, to afford compounds of formula I. Synthesis of Aldehyde. Ketone and Carboxylic Acid Starting materials
The aldehyde, ketone and carboxylic acids employed in the above reactions can be readily prepared by several divergent synthetic routes with the particular route selected relative to the ease of compound preparation, commercial availability of starting materials, whether m is zero or one, whether n is one or two, etc.
A. Synthesis of Aldehydes and Ketones
The aldehyde and ketone compounds, e.g. 1, 6 and 7, employed in this invention can be readily prepared by oxidizing the corresponding alcohol using conventional oxidizing agents. For example, Swern oxidation of N-protected amino primary alcohols affords the corresponding aldehyde. Typically, this reaction is conducted by contacting the alcohol with a mixture of oxalyl chloride and dimethyl sulfoxide in the presence of a tertiary amine, such as triethylamine. Generally, this reaction is conducted in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at an intial temperature of about -78 °C and then at ambient temperamre for about 0.25 to 2 hours to afford the aldehyde. The alcohols employed in this reaction are either commercially available or can be prepared using conventional reagents and procedures. For example, suitable alcohols can be prepared by reduction of the corresponding amino acids or amino acid esters using conventional reducing agents such as lithium aluminum hydride and the like.
B. Synthesis of Carboxylic Acids
The carboxylic acids of foπnula 8, where m is 0, can be prepared by various conventional procedures. For example, reaction of a halo acetic acid 11
(where Z' is a halo group such as chloro or bromo and R2 is as defined herein) with a primary amine 12 (where R1 is as defined herein) provides an amino acid 13 as illustrated in Scheme 3. Alternatively, leaving groups other than halo may be employed such as triflate and the like. Additionally, suitable esters of JI may be employed in this reaction.
As shown in Scheme 3 , a suitable haloacetic acid derivative JJ is reacted with a primary amine 12 under conditions which provide for amino acid J3. This reaction is described by, for example, Yates, et al.10 and proceeds by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of haloacetic acid JJ with primary amine 12 in a suitable inert diluent such as water, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and the like. The reaction employs an excess of a suitable base such as sodium bicarbonate, sodium hydroxide, etc. to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction. The reaction is preferably conducted at from about 25 °C to about 100°C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. This reaction is further described in U.S. Patent No. 3,598.859, which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Upon reaction completion, N- substimted amino acid 13 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like.
Each of the reagents employed in this reaction (e.g. , haloacetic acid 11. and primary amine J2) are well known in the art with a plurality of each being commercially available.
In an alternative embodiment, the R1 group can be coupled to an alanine ester (or other suitable amino acid ester) by conventional N-arylation. For example, a stoichiometric equivalent or slight excess of the amino acid ester can be dissolved in a suitable diluent such as DMSO and coupled with a halo-R1 compound, Z'-R1 where Z' is a halo group such as chloro or bromo and R1 is as defmed above. The reaction is conducted in the presence of an excess of base such as sodium hydroxide to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction. The reaction typically proceeds at from 15 °C to about 250°C and is complete in about 1 to 24 hours. Upon reaction completion, N-substituted amino acid ester is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like. This ester is then hydrolyzed by conventional methods to provide for carboxylic acid 8, where m is 0.
In still another alternative embodiment, ester ified amino acids of formula 8, where m is 0, can be prepared by reductive amination of a suitable pyruvate ester J4 (where R is typically an alkyl group and R2 is as defined above) with a primary amine J2 (where R1 is as defined herein) in the manner illustrated in Scheme 4.
The reaction shown in Scheme 4 is typically conducted by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of pyruvate ester J4 and amine J2 in an inert diluent such as methanol, ethanol and the like under conditions which provide for imine formation (not shown). The imine formed is then reduced under conventional conditions by a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride, H2/palladium on carbon and the like to form the N-substituted amino acid ester J5. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the reducing agent is H2/palladium on carbon which is incoφorated into the initial reaction medium which permits imine reduction in situ in a one pot procedure to provide for the N- substimted amino acid ester J5. The reaction is preferably conducted at from about 20 °C to about 80 °C at a pressure of from 1 to 10 atmospheres until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. Upon reaction completion, N-substituted amino acid ester 15 is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like. Subsequent hydrolysis of the ester J5 leads to the corresponding carboxylic acid derivative 8, where m is 0.
The carboxylic acids of formula 8, where m is 1, can be prepared by conventional coupling of an acetic acid derivative 4 (where R1, T, X' and X" are as defined herein) with a primary amine of an esterified amino acid (where R is typically an alkyl group and R2 is as defined herein) as illustrated in Scheme 5.
Scheme 5
As shown in Scheme 5, this reaction merely involves coupling of a suitable acetic acid derivative 4 with the primary amine of amino acid ester 16 under conditions which provide for the N-acetyl derivative J7. This reaction is conventionally conducted as described for peptide synthesis and synthetic methods used therein can also be employed to prepare the N-acetyl amino acid esters J7 of this invention. For example, well known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides with or without the use of well known additives such as Ν- hydroxysuccinimide, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, etc. can be used to facilitate coupling. The reaction is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic polar diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like. Alternatively, the acid halide of compound 4 can be employed and, when so employed, it is typically employed in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N- methylmoφholine and the like.
The coupling reaction of 4 and J6 is preferably conducted at from about 0°C to about 60 °C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. Upon reaction completion, N-acetyl amino acid ester J7 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like or alternatively is hydrolyzed to the corresponding acid without purification and/or isolation other than conventional work-up (e.g., aqueous extraction, etc.).
Each of the reagents (e.g., acetic acid derivative 4 and amino acid ester 16) are well known in the art with a plurality of each being commercially available.
Carboxylic acids, such as 4, can also be coupled to amines prepared by use of polymer supported forms of carbodiimide peptide coupling reagents. A polymer supported form of EDC, for example, has been described (Tetrahedron Letters, 34(48), 7685 (1993))11. Additionally, a new carbodiimide coupling reagent, PEPC, and its corresponding polymer supported forms have been discovered and are very useful for the preparation of such compounds.
Polymers suitable for use in making a polymer supported coupling reagent are either commercially available or may be prepared by methods well known to the artisan skilled in the polymer arts. A suitable polymer must possess pendant sidechains bearing moieties reactive with the terminal amine of the carbodiimide. Such reactive moieties include chloro, bromo, iodo and methanesulfonyl. Preferably, the reactive moiety is a chloromethyl group. Additionally, the polymer's backbone must be inert to both the carbodiimide and reaction conditions under which the ultimate polymer bound coupling reagents will be used.
Certain hydroxymethylated resins may be converted into chloromethylated resins useful for the preparation of polymer supported coupling reagents. Examples of these hydroxylated resins include the 4-hydroxymethylphenyl- acetamidomethyl resin (Pam Resin) and 4-benzyloxybenzyl alcohol resin (Wang Resin) available from Advanced Chemtech of Louisville, Kentucky, USA (see
Advanced Chemtech 1993-1994 catalog, page 115). The hydroxymethyl groups of these resins may be converted into the desired chloromethyl groups by any of a number of methods well known to the skilled artisan.
Preferred resins are the chloromethylated styrene/divinylbenzene resins because of their ready commercial availability. As the name suggests, these resins are already chloromethylated and require no chemical modification prior to use. These resins are commercially known as Merrifield 's resins and are available from Aldrich Chemical Company of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA (see Aldrich 1994-1995 catalog, page 899). Methods for the preparation of PEPC and its polymer supported forms are outlined in Scheme 6.
Scheme 6
Functionalized Resin where (p ) = an inert polymer and LG = Cl, Br. I or OS02CH3
Such methods are described more fully in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/019, 79014 filed June 14, 1996 which application is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Briefly, PEPC is prepared by first reacting ethyl isocyanate with l-(3-aminopropyl)pyrrolidine. The resulting urea is treated with 4-toluenesulfonyl chloride to provide PEPC. The polymer supported form is prepared by reaction of PEPC with an appropriate resin under standard conditions to give the desired reagent.
The carboxylic acid coupling reactions employing these reagents are performed at about ambient to about 45 °C, for from about 3 to 120 hours.
Typically, the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with CHC^ and concentrating the remaining organics under reduced pressure. As discussed supra, isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure. Preparation of Cyclic Compounds (e.g. Benzaepinones. Dibenzazepinones. Benzodiazepines and Related Compounds)
The cyclic compounds and amino-substituted derivatives thereof, such as 2, employed in the reactions described above are either known in the art or can be prepared by art-recognized procedures using commercially available starting materials and reagents.
For example, 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one may be prepared by cyclizing a chloromethyl amide intermediate using the procedures set forth in R. F. C. Brown et al. , Tetrahedron Letters 1971, 8, 667-67012 and references cited therein.
Additionally, the synthesis of a representative cyclic compuond, i.e., a 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, is illustrated in Scheme 7. As will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art, the synthetic procedure illustrated in Scheme 1 and the reaction conditions described below can be modified by selecting the appropriate starting materials and reagents to allow the preparation of other cyclic amines suitable for use in this invention.
Scheme 7 t
22 Boc
As shown in Scheme 7, 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivatives, 23, wherein R6, R7, p and q are as defined above, can be readily prepared in several steps from a 2-bromotoluene derivative 18 and a 2- bromoaniline derivative 20. In this synthetic procedure, the 2-bromotoluene derivative, 18, is first converted into the corresponding 2-methylphenylboronate ester, 19. This reaction is typically conducted by treating 18 with about 1.0 to about 2.1 equivalents of an alkyl lithium reagent, preferably sec-butyl lithium or tert-butyl lithium, in an inert diluent, such as THF, at a temperamre ranging from about -80 °C to about -60 °C for about 0.25 to about 1 hour. The resulting lithium anion is then treated in situ with an excess, preferably 1.5 equivalents, of a trialkylborate, such as trimethylborate. This reaction is initially conducted at - 80 °C to about -60 °C and then allowed to warm to about 0°C to about 30 °C for about 0.5 to about 3 hours. The resulting methyl boronate ester is typically not isolated, but is preferably converted in situ into the pinacol ester by treating the reaction mixmre with an excess, preferably about 2.0 equivalents, of pinacol.
This reaction is typically conducted at ambient temperamre for about 12 to about 24 hours to afford the 2-methylphenylboronate ester, 19, in which both R3 groups are preferably joined together to form -C(CH3)2C(CH3)r.
In a separate reaction, the amino group of a 2-bromoaniline derivative,
20, is converted into the N-Boc derivative 21 by treating 20 with about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of di-tert-butyl-dicarbonate. Typically, this reaction is conducted at a temperamre ranging from 25 °C to about 100°C for about 12 to 48 hours to afford the N-Boc-2-bromoaniline derivative 21.
As further illustrated in Scheme 7, the 2-methylphenylboronate ester, 19, and the N-Boc-2-bromoaniline derivative 21 can then be coupled to form the biphenyl derivative 22. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting 21 with about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of 19 and about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of potassium carbonate in the presence of a pallidium catalyst, preferably tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)pallidium(0). Generally, this coupling reaction is conducted in a diluent, preferably 20% water/dioxane, under an inert atmosphere at a temperature ranging from about 50 °C to about 100°C for about 6 to 24 hours.
Biphenyl derivative 22 is then readily converted into the 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 23 by carboxylation of the 2-methyl group, followed by cyclization to form the e-caprolactam. The carboxylation reaction is typically conducted by contacting 22 with about 2.0 to about 2.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sec-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium and the like, in an inert diluent, such as THF, at a temperamre ranging from about -100°C to about -20°C for about 0.5 to 6 hours. The resulting dianion is then treated with excess anhydrous carbon dioxide to form the carboxylate. Treatment of the carboxy late with excess hydrogen chloride in a suitable diluent, such as methanol, at a temperamre ranging from about 25 °C to about 100°C then affords the 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 23. Various other cyclic compounds can be prepared by routine modifications of the above described procedures.
Preferred synthetic procedures for aminating a representative compound are illustrated in Scheme 8. It will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art that the synthetic procedure illustrated in Scheme 8 and the following reaction conditions can be modified by selecting the appropriate starting materials and reagents to allow the preparation of other amino compounds suitable for use in this invention. Scheme 8
As shown in Scheme 8, 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azeρin-6-one, 23, is optionally N-alkylated using conventional reagents and conditions to provide a 7- alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative, 24. Typically, this reaction is conducted by first contacting 23 with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium hydride, sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like, in an inert diluent, such as DMF, THF and the like, at a temperature ranging from about -78°C to about 50°C for about 0.25 to about 6 hours. The resulting anion is then treated in situ with an excess, preferably about 1.1 to about 2.0 equivalents, of an alkyl, substimted alkyl, cycloalkyl halide, etc., typically a chloride, bromide or iodide. This reaction is typically conducted at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 60 °C for about 1.0 to about 48 hours to afford the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative, 24.
The 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 24 is then oximated by contacting 24 with an excess, preferably with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as sodium bis(trimethysilyl)amide and the like, in the presence of about 1.0 to about 2.0 equivalents of an alkyl nitrite. Suitable alkyl nitrites for use in this reaction include, by way of example, butyl nitrite, isoamyl nitrite and the like. This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as THF and the like, at a temperature ranging from about -10°C to about 20°C for about 0.5 to about 6 hours to afford the 7-alkyl-5-oximo-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative 25.
Reduction of 25 using conventional reagents and conditions then affords the 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26. Preferably, this reduction reaction is conducted by hydrogenating the oxime 25 in the presence of a catalyst, such as Raney nickel. This reaction is typically conducted under about 200 psi to about 600 psi of hydrogen at a temperamre of about 70 °C to about 120°C for about 8 to 48 hours in a diluent, preferably a mixture of ethanol and ammonia (about 20:1). Alternatively, in another preferred procedure, the oxime may be reduced using 10% Pd/C and between about 30 to about 60 psi of hydrogen at a temperamre ranging from about 20 °C to about 50 °C for about 4 hours. The resulting 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26 is generally purified using well known procedures, such as recrystallization and/or chromatography.
Alternatively, 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones,
26, can be prepared by first forming the 5-iodo derivative 27 of 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 23. This reaction is typically conducted as described in A. O. King et al.13 by treating 23 with an excess, preferably about 1.2 to about 2.5 equivalents, of trimethylsilyl iodide in the presence of an excess of a trialkyamine, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TMEDA and the like, at a temperamre ranging from about -20 °C to about 0°C for about 3 to 30 minutes and then adding about 1.1 to about 2.0 equivalents of iodine (L). Typically, after addition of the iodide, the reaction is stirred at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 20 °C for about 2 to about 4 hours to afford 5- iodo-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 27.
Displacement of iodide from 27 using an alkali metal azide then affords 5- azido-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 28. Typically, this reaction is conducted by contacting 27 with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of sodium azide in an inert diluent, such as DMF, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 12 to about 48 hours.
The azido derivative 28 is then reduced to the corresponding amino derivative 29 using conventional procedures and reagents. For example, the azido group is preferably reduced by contacting 28 with an excess, preferably with about 3 equivalents, of triphenylphosphine in a diluent, preferably a mixmre of THF and water. This reduction reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 12 to 48 hours to afford 5-amino-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 29. The amino group of 29 is then protected or blocked using a conventional amino blocking group. Preferably, compound 29 is treated with about 1.0 to about 1.1 equivalents of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in the presence of an excess, preferably about 2 to about 3 equivalents, of a trialkylamine, such as triethylamine. This reaction is typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as
THF, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C for 3 to about 24 hours to provide 5-(N-Boc-amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 30.
Compound 30 is then optionally N-alkylated to afford, after de-blocking of the amino group, a 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 26. The N-alkylation reaction is typically conducted by treating 30 with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of an alkyl halide, a substimted alkyl halide or a cycloalkyl halide in the presence of about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as cesium carbonate and the like. This reaction is generally conducted in an inert diluent, such as DMF and the like, at a temperamre ranging from about
25 °C to about 100°C for about 12 to about 48 hours.
Representative alkyl, substimted alkyl and cycloalkyl halides suitable for use in this N-alkylation reaction include, by way of illustration, l-iodo-2- methylpropane, methyl bromoacetate, l-chloro-3,3-dimefhyl-2-butanone, 1- chloro-4-phenylbutane, bromomethylcyclopropane, l-bromo-2,2,2- trifluoroethane, bromocyclohexane, 1-bromohexane and the like.
The N-Boc protecting group is then removed using conventional procedures and reagents to afford the 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 26. This deblocking reaction is typically conducted by treating the N-Boc compound 30 with anhydrous hydrogen chloride in an inert diluent, such as 1,4-dioxane, at a temperamre ranging from about 0°C to about 50°C for about 2 to about 8 hours. The resulting 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro- 6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26 is generally purified using well known procedures, such as recrystallization and/or chromatography. The 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones, 26, can also be prepared via an azide transfer reaction as illustrated in Scheme 9.
Scheme 9
As shown in Scheme 9, 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, 23, is first N-alkylated as described above using conventional reagents and conditions to provide a 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative, 24.
The 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 24 is then reacted with an azide transfer reagent to afford 5-azido-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 31. Typically, this reaction is conducted by first contacting 24 with an excess, preferably with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as lithium diisopropylamine and the like, in an inert diluent such as THF, at a temperature ranging from about -90 °C to about -60 °C for about 0.25 to about 2.0 hours. The resulting anion is then treated with an excess, preferably with about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of an azide transfer reagent, such as 2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl azide (trisyl azide). This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about -90°C to about -60°C for about 0.25 to about 2.0 hours. The reaction mixture is then typically treated with an excess of glacial acetic acid and the mixture is allowed to warm to ambient temperature and then heated at about 35 °C to about 50 °C for about 2 to 4 hours to afford the 5-azido-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one derivative 31. Reduction of 31 as described above using conventional reagents and conditions then affords the 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one 26.
If desired, the aryl rings of 5-amino-7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones, 26, and similar or related compounds may be partially or fully saturated by treatment with hydrogen in the presence of a hydrogention catalyst. Typically, this reaction is conducted by treating 26 with hydrogen at a pressure of about 10 to about 100 psi in the presence of a catalyst, such as rhodium on carbon. This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about 20°C to about 100°C for about 12 to 96 hours in a suitable diluent, such as ethyl acetate/acetic acid (1 : 1) and the like.
Other methods for preparing intermediates useful in this invention are described in U.S. Patent Application No. 09/102,726, filed on June 22, 1998 and in U.S. Patent Application No. / , , filed on even date herewith
(Attorney Docket No. 002010-345), both entitled "Polycyclic α-Amino-e- caprolactams and Related Compounds", the disclosures of which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety.
Additionally, the synthesis of various benzapinones and related compounds are described in Busacca et al., Tetrahedron Lett. , 33, 165-168 (1992); Crosisier et al., U.S. Patent No. 4,080,449; J. A. Robl et al. Tetrahedron Lett. , 36(10), 1593-1596 (1995); Flynn et al. J. Med. Chem. 36,
2420-2423 (1993); Orito et al. Tetrahedron, 36, 1017-1021 (1980); Kawase et al., J. Org. Chem. , 54, 3394-3403 (1989); Lowe et al., J. Med. Chem. 37, 3789- 3811 (1994); Robl et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. , 4, 1789-1794 (1994); Skiles et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. , 3, 773-778 (1993); Grunewald et al., J. Med. Chem. , 39(18), 3539- (1996); Warshawsky et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. , 6, 957-962 (1996); Ben-Ishai, et al., Tetrahedron, 43, 439-450 (1987); van Neil et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. 5, 1421-1426 (1995); and reference cited therein. These publications and patents are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety.
Similarly, various benzodiazepine derivatives suitable for use in this invention can be prepared using conventional procedures and reagents. For example, a 2-aminobenzophenone can be readily coupled to α-(isopropylthio)-N- (benzyloxycarbonyl)glycine by first forming the acid chloride of the glycine derivative with oxayl chloride, and then coupling the acid chloride with the 2- aminobenzophenone in the presence of a base, such as 4-methy lmoφholine, to afford the 2-[α-(isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)glycinyl]- aminobenzophenone. Treatment of this compound with ammonia gas in the presence of an excess, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents, of mercury (II) chloride then affords the 2-[N-(α-amino)-N'-(benzyloxycarbonyl)- glycinyl]aminobenzophenone. This intermediate can then be readily cyclized by treatment with glacial acetic acid and ammonium acetate to provide the 3-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-onel . Subsequent removal of the Cbz group affords the 3-amino-2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl- 1H-1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one.
Alternatively, 2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-ones can be readily aminated at the 3-position using conventional azide transfer reactions followed by reduction of the resulting azido group to form the corresponding amino group. The conditions for these and related reactions are described in the examples set forth below. Additionally, 2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-ones are readily alkylated at the 1 -position using conventional procedures and reagents. For example, this reaction is typically conducted by first treating the benzodiazepinone with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium tert-butoxide, potassium 1,1,1,3,3,3- hexamethyldisilazane, cesium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as DMF. This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature ranging from about -78°C to about 80 °C for about 0.5 to about 6 hours. The resulting anion is then contacted with an excess, preferably about 1.1 to about 3.0 equivalents, of an alkyl halide, typically an alkyl chloride, bromide or iodide. Generally, this reaction is conducted at a temperamre of about 0°C to about 100°C for about 1 to about 48 hours.
Additionally, the 3-amino-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepines employed in this invention are typically prepared by first coupling malonic acid with a 1 ,2-phenylenediamine. Conditions for this reaction are well known in the art and are described, for example, in PCT Application WO 96-US8400 960603. Subsequent alkylation and amination using conventional procedures and reagents affords various 3-amino-l,5-bis(alkyl)-2,4- dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepines. Such procedures are described in further detail in the example set forth below.
In the synthesis of compounds of formula I using the synthetic methods described herein, the starting materials can contain a chiral center (e.g., alanine) and, when a racemic starting material is employed, the resulting product is a mixmre of R,S enantiomers. Alternatively, a chiral isomer of the starting material can be employed and, if the reaction protocol employed does not racemize this starting material, a chiral product is obtained. Such reaction protocols can involve inversion of the chiral center during synthesis.
Accordingly, unless otherwise indicated, the products of this invention are a mixmre of R,S enantiomers. Preferably, however, when a chiral product is desired, the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative.
Alternatively, chiral products can be obtained via purification techniques which separates enantiomers from a R,S mixture to provide for one or the other stereoisomer. Such techniques are well known in the art.
Pharmaceutical Formulations When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of formula I are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula I above associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about 10 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Preferably, the compound of formula I above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound acmally administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can separated by enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incoφorated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles. Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face masks tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
The following formulation examples illustrate the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
Formulation Example 1
Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 30.0
Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearate 5.0
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 2
A tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below: Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 25.0 Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
Stearic acid 5.0
The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
Ingredient Weight %
Active Ingredient 5
Lactose 95
The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixmre is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
Formulation Example 4
Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone
(as 10% solution in sterile water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 1.0 mg
Total 120 mg The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinyl-pyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60°C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 150 mg.
Formulation Example 5 Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 40.0 mg
Starch 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg Total 150.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 6
Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 25 mg
Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixmre is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
Formulation Example 7 Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11 %)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose 1.75 g
Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to 5.0 mL
The active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Formulation Example 8
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg
Total 425.0 mg The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 560 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 9
A subcutaneous formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 1.0 mg corn oil 1 mL
(Depending on the solubility of the active ingredient in corn oil, up to about 5.0 mg or more of the active ingredient may be employed in this formulation, if desired).
Formulation Example 10 A topical formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 1-10 g
Emulsifying Wax 30 g
Liquid Paraffin 20 g
White Soft Paraffin to 100 g
The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incoφorated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incoφorated by reference. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Frequently, it will be desirable or necessary to introduce the pharmaceutical composition to the brain, either directly or indirectly. Direct techniques usually involve placement of a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier. One such implantable delivery system used for the transport of biological factors to specific anatomical regions of the body is described in U.S. Patent 5,011,472 which is herein incoφorated by reference.
Indirect techniques, which are generally preferred, usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs. Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier. Alternatively, the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985).
Utility
The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful in inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in diagnosing and treating Alzheimer's disease in mammals including humans. As noted above, the compounds described herein are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems described above. Additionally, in order to enhance the in vivo serum half-life of the administered compound, the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds. A variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871 , 4,501,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is incoφorated herein by reference.
The amount of compound administered to the patient will vary depending upon what is being administered, the puφose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from AD in an amount sufficient to at least partially arrest further onset of the symptoms of the disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "therapeutically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the degree or severity of AD in the patient, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. Preferably, for use as therapeutics, the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
In prophylactic applications, compositions are administered to a patient at risk of developing AD (determined for example by genetic screening or familial trait) in an amount sufficient to inhibit the onset of symptoms of the disease. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "prophylactically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. Preferably, for use as prophylactics, the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
As noted above, the compounds administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to 9 and most preferably from 7 and 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts.
The compounds described herein are also suitable for use in the administration of the compounds to a cell for diagnostic and drug discovery puφoses. Specifically, the compounds may be used in the diagnosis of cells releasing and/or synthesizing β-amyloid peptide. In addition the compounds described herein are useful for the measurement and evaluation of the activity of other candidate drugs on the inhibition of the cellular release and/or synthesis of β-amyloid peptide.
The following synthetic and biological examples are offered to illustrate this invention and are not to be construed in any way as limiting the scope of this invention. EXAMPLES
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning.
BEMP 2-tert-butylimino-2-diethylamino-l,3- dimethylperhydro-1 ,3 ,2-diazaphosphorine
Boc t-butoxycarbonyl BOP benzotriazol-1-yloxy- tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate bd broad doublet bs broad singlet d doublet dd doublet of doublets
DIC diisopropylcarbodiimide
DMF dimethylformamide
DMAP dimethylaminopyridine
DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
EDC ethyl- 1 -(3-dimethyaminopropyl)carbodiimide eq. equivalents
EtOAc ethyl acetate g grams
HOBT 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate
Hunig's base diisopropylethylamine
L liter m multiplet
M molar max maximum meq milliequivalent mg milligram mL milliliter mm millimeter mmol millimole
MOC methoxyoxycarbonyl
N normal
N/A not available ng nanogram nm nanometers
OD optical density
PEPC l-(3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)propyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide
PP-HOBT piperidine-piperidine- 1 -hydroxybenzotrizole psi pounds per square inch φ = phenyl q = quartet quint. = quintet φm = rotations per minute s = singlet t = triplet
TFA = trifluoroacetic acid
THF = tetrahydrofuran tic = thin layer chromatography μL = microliter
UV = ultra-violet
In the examples below, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius (unless otherwise indicated). The compounds set forth in the examples below were prepared using the following general procedures as indicated.
In the following examples and procedures, the term "Aldrich" indicates that the compound or reagent used in the procedure is commercially available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. , 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233 USA; the term "Fluka" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Fluka Chemical Coφ., 980 South 2nd Street, Ronkonkoma NY 11779 USA; the term "Lancaster" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Lancaster Synthesis, Inc., P.O. Box 100 Windham, NH 03087 USA; the term "Sigma" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Sigma, P.O. Box 14508, St. Louis MO 63178 USA; the term "Chemservice" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Chemservice Inc., Westchester, PA; the term "Bachem" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Bachem Biosciences Inc., 3700 Horizon Drive, Renaissance at Gulph Mills, King of Prussia, PA 19406 USA; the term "Maybridge" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Maybridge Chemical Co. Trevillett, Tintagel, Cornwall PL34 OHW United Kingdom; and the term "TCI" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from TCI America, 9211 North Harborgate Street, Portland OR 97203; the term "Alfa" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Johnson Matthey Catalog Company, Inc. 30 Bond Street, Ward Hill, MA 01835-0747; the term "Novabiochem" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Calbiochem-Novabiochem Coφ. 10933 North Torrey Pines Road, P.O. Box 12087, La Jolla CA 92039-2087; the term "Oakwood" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Oakwood Products, Inc., 1741 Old Dunbar Rd., West Columbia, SC 29169; the term "Advanced Chemtech" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Advanced Chemtech, Louisville, KY; the term "Pfaltz & Bauer" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Pfaltz & Bauer, Waterbury, CT, USA; and the term "Fluorochem" indicates that the compound or reagent is commercially available from Fluorochem Ltd. Wesley St. Old Glossop, Derbyshire SKI 3 9RY, United Kingdom (for U.S. sales office see Oakwood Products, Inc. above).
I. Coupling Procedures
The following coupling procedures may be used to prepare compounds of this invention:
GENERAL PROCEDURE A First EDC Coupling Procedure To a 1 : 1 mixture of the corresponding carboxylic acid and the corresponding amino acid ester or amide in CH2C12 at O°C was added 1.5 equivalents triethylamine, followed by 2.0 equivalents hydroxy benzotriazole monohydrate and then 1.25 equivalents of ethyl-3-(3-dimethylamino)propyl carbodiimide HCl. The reaction mixmre was stirred overnight at room temperamre and then transferred to a separatory funnel. The mixture was washed with water, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, IN HCl and saturated aqueous NaCl, and then dried over MgSO4. The resulting solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the crude product. GENERAL PROCEDURE B Second EDC Coupling Procedure A mixmre of the corresponding acid (1 eqv), N-1-hydroxybenzotriazole (1.6 eqv), the corresponding amine (1 eqv), N-methylmoφholine ( 3 eqv) and dichloromethane (or DMF for insoluble substrates) was cooled in an ice-water bath and stirred until a clear solution was obtained. EDC (1.3 eqv) was then added to the reaction mixmre. The cooling bath was then allowed to warm to ambient temperamre over 1-2 h and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was then evaporated to dryness under vacuum. To the residue was added 20% aqueous potassium carbonate and the mixmre was shaken throughly and then allowed to stand until the oily product solidified (overnight if necessary). The solid product was then collected by Alteration, washed thoroughly with 20% aqueous potassium carbonate, water, 10% HCl, and water to give the product, usually in pure state. No racemization was observed.
GENERAL PROCEDURE C Third EDC Coupling Procedure The carboxylic acid was dissolved in methylene chloride. The corresponding amino acid ester or amide (1 eq.), N-methylmoφholine (5 eq.) and hydroxy benzotriazole monohydrate (1.2 eq.) were added in sequence. A cooling bath was applied to the round bottomed flask until the solution reached 0°C. At that time, 1.2 eq. of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride was added. The solution was allowed to stir overnight and come to room temperamre under nitrogen pressure. The reaction mixmre was worked up by washing the organic phase with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate, 0.1M citric acid, and brine before drying with sodium sulfate. The solvents were then removed to yield crude product. GENERAL PROCEDURE D Fourth EDC Coupling Procedure A round bottom flask was charged with the corresponding carboxylic acid (1.0 eq.), hydroxy benzotriazole hydrate (1.1 eq.) and the corresponding amine (1.0 eq.) in THF under nitrogen atmosphere. An appropriate amount (1.1 eq for free amines and 2.2 eq. for hydrochloride amine salts) of base, such as Hunig's base was added to the well stirred mixmre followed by EDC (1.1 eq.). After stirring from 4 to 17 hours at room temperamre the solvent was removed at reduced pressure, the residue taken up in ethyl acetate (or similar solvent) and water, washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, 1 N HCl, brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and the solvent removed at reduced pressure to provide the product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE E BOP Coupling Procedure To a stirred solution of N-(3,5-difluorophenylacetyl)alanine (2 mmol) in DMF, cooled in an ice-water bath, was added BOP (2.4 mmol) and N- methylmoφholine (6 mmol). The reaction mixmre was stirred for 50 min. and then a solution of α-amino-γ-lactam (2 mmol) in DMF cooled at 0 °C was added. The cooling bath was allowed to warm to ambient temperature over 1-2 h and the reaction mixmre was then stirred overnight. A 20% aqueous potassium carbonate solution (60 mL) was added and this mixmre shaken throughly. No solid formed. The mixture was then washed with ethyl acetate (150 mL) and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to give a white solid. Water (50 mL) was then added and this mixmre shaken throughly . The precipitate that formed was collected by filtration, then washed thoroughly with water, followed by 1 mL of diethyl ether to give the product (51 mg, 0.16 mmol, 7.8%). GENERAL PROCEDURE F Coupling of an Acid Chloride with an Amino Acid Ester To a stirred solution of (D,L)-alanine isobutyl ester hydrochloride (4.6 mmol) in 5 ml of pyridine was added 4.6 mmol of the acid chloride. Precipitation occurred immediately. The mixmre was stirred for 3.5 h, dissolved in 100 mL of diethyl ether, washed with 10% HCl three times, brine once, 20% potassium carbonate once and brine once. The solution was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to yield the product. Other amino acid esters may also be employed in this procedure.
GENERAL PROCEDURE G Coupling of a Carboxylic Acid with an Amino Acid Ester A solution of the carboxylic acid (3.3 mmol) and l,l '-carbodiimidazole (CDI) in 20 mL THF was stirred for 2 h. (D,L)-alanine isobutyl ester hydrochloride (3.6 mmol) was added, followed by 1.5 mL (10.8 mmol) of triethylamine. The reaction mixmre was stirred overnight. The reaction mixmre was dissolved in 100 mL of diethyl ether, washed with 10% HCl three times, brine once, 20% potassium carbonate once and brine once. The solution was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to yield the product. Other amino acid esters may also be employed in this procedure.
GENERAL PROCEDURE H Fifth EDC Coupling Procedure In a round bottom flask was added a carboxylic acid (1.1 eq.) in THF, an amine hydrochloride (1.0 eq.), 1 -hydroxy benzotriazole hydrate (1.1 eq.), N,N- diisopropylethylamine (2.1 eq.), followed by l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) (1.1 eq.). The reaction mixmre stirred at room temperature for 10-20 hours under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The mixmre was diluted with EtOAc and washed with 0.1 M HCl (1 x 10 mL), saturated NaHCO3 (1 x 10 mL), H2O (1 x 10 mL), and brine and dried over MgSO4. The drying agent was removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel followed by trituration from EtOAc and hexanes.
GENERAL PROCEDURE I Sixth EDC Coupling Procedure To a solution or suspension of the amine or amine hydrochloride (1.0 eq.) in THF (0.05-0.1 M) under N2 at 0°C was added the carboxylic acid (1.0-1.1 eq.), hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (1.1-1.15 eq.), Hunig's base (1.1 eq. for free amines and 1.1-2.3 eq. for hydrochloride amine salts), followed by l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (1.1-1.15 eq.). The cooling bath was removed and the mixture allowed to warm to room temperamre for 10-24 hours. The solution or mixture was diluted with EtOAc, in a 3-5 volume multiple of the initial THF volume, and washed with 0.1-1.0 M aq. HCl (1 or 2x), dilute NaHCO3 (1 or 2x), and brine (lx). Then, the organic phase was dried over either MgSO4 or Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated to provide the crude product, which was either further purified or utilized without further purification.
GENERAL PROCEDURE J EEDQ Coupling Procedure To a solution of the amine in THF (1.0 eq., 0.05-0.08 M, final molarity) under N2 at room temperamre was added the N-t-Boc protected amino acid (1.1 eq., either as a solid or in THF via cannula), followed by EEDQ (Aldrich, 1.1 eq.). The pale yellow solution was stirred at room temperamre for 16-16.5 hours, then diluted with EtOAc (in a 3-5 volume multiple of the initial THF volume), and washed with 1M aq. HCl (2x), dilute aq. NaHCO, (2x), and brine (lx). The organic phase was dried over either Na,SO4 or MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. II. Carboxylic Acids
The following procedures may be used to prepare carboxylic acid intermediates useful in the present invention:
GENERAL PROCEDURE II-A Ester Hydrolysis to Free Acid Ester hydrolysis to the free acid was conducted by conventional methods. Below are two examples of such conventional de-esterification methods.
Method A: To a carboxylic ester compound in a 1: 1 mixmre of CH3OH/H2O was added 2-5 equivalents of K2CO3. The mixture was heated to 50°C for 0.5 to 1.5 hours until tic showed complete reaction. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and the methanol was removed on a rotary evaporator. The pH of the remaining aqueous solution was adjusted to ~ 2, and ethyl acetate was added to extract the product. The organic phase was then washed with saturated aqueous NaCl and dried over MgSO4. The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the product.
Method B: The amino acid ester was dissolved in dioxane/water (4: 1) to which was added LiOH ( ~2 eq.) that was dissolved in water such that the total solvent after addition was about 2: 1 dioxane: water. The reaction mixture was stirred until reaction completion and the dioxane was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in water and washed with ether. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was acidified to pH 2. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate extracts were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure after filtration. The residue was purified by conventional methods (e.g., recrystallization). GENERAL PROCEDURE II-B Acid Chloride Preparation 3,5-Difluorophenylacetic acid (30 g, 0.174 mol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in dichloromethane and this solution was cooled to 0°C. DMF (0.5 mL, catalytic) was added followed by the dropwise addition of oxalyl chloride (18 mL, 0.20 mol) over a 5 minute period. The reaction was stirred for 3 h and then rotoevaporated at reduced pressure to give an oil which was placed on a high vacuum pump for 1 h to afford 3,5-difluorophenylacetyl chloride as a thin yellow oil. Other acid chlorides can be prepared in a similar manner.
GENERAL PROCEDURE II-C
Schotten-Baumann Procedure 3,5-Difluorophenylacetyl chloride (from General Procedure II-B) was added dropwise to a 0°C solution of L-alanine (Aldrich) (16.7 g, 0.187 mol) in 2 N sodium hydroxide (215 mL, 0.43 mol). The reaction was stirred for 1 h at 0°C and then overnight at room temperature. The reaction was diluted with water (100 mL), then extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 150 mL). The organic layer was then washed with brine (200 mL), dried over MgSO4, and rotoevaporated at reduced pressure to a residue. Recrystallization of the residue from ethyl acetate/hexanes afforded the desired product (34.5 g, 82% yield). Other acid chlorides may be used in this procedure to provide for intermediates useful in this invention.
GENERAL PROCEDURE II-D Reductive Amination To a solution of the arylamine in ethanol in a hydrogenation flask was added 1 equivalent of the 2-oxocarboxylic acid ester (e.g., pyruvate ester), followed by 10% palladium on carbon (25 weight percent based on the arylamine). The reaction was hydrogenated at 20 psi H2 on a Parr shaker until complete reaction was indicated by tic (30 minutes to 16 hours). The reaction mixture was then filtered through a pad of Celite 545 (available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc.) and stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator. The crude product residue was then further purified via chromatography.
The following procedures illustrate the synthesis of carboxylic acid intermediates useful in preparing compounds of this invention:
Example A Synthesis of N-(Phenylacetyl)-L-alanine
Using General Procedure II-C, the title compound was prepared from phenylacetyl chloride (Aldrich) and L-alanine (Aldrich) as a solid having a melting point of 102- 104 ° C .
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 9.14 (br s, IH), 7.21-7.40 (m, 5H), 6.20 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, IH), 4.55 (m, IH), 3.61 (s, 2H), 1.37 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 176.0, 171.8, 134.0, 129.4, 127.5, 48.3, 43.2, 17.9.
Example B Synthesis of N-(3,5-Difluorophenylacetyl)-L-alanine
Using General Procedure II-C, the title compound was prepared from 3,5- difluorophenylacetyl chloride (General Procedure II-B) and L-alanine (Aldrich).
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 8.32 (br s, 0.3H), 6.71 (m, 2H), 6.60 (m, IH), 4.74 (br s, 1.7H), 4.16 (m, IH), 3.36 (s, 2H), 1.19 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 175.9, 172.4, 164.4 (dd. J = 13.0, 245.3 Hz), 141.1, 1 13.1 (dd, J = 7.8, 17.1 Hz), 102.9 (t, J = 25.7 Hz), 49.5, 42.7, 17.5. Example C Synthesis of N-(Cyclopenty lacetyl)-L-phenylglycine
Step A - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-phenylglvcine Methyl Ester
Following General Procedure A above using cyclopentylacetic acid (Aldrich) and phenylglycine methyl ester hydrochloride (Novabiochem), the title compound was prepared as a solid having a melting point of 83-86°C. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.28 in 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes) and purification was by recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.35 (s, 5H), 6.44 (bd, IH), 5.6 (d, IH), 3.72 (s, 3H), 2.24 (bs, 3H), 1.9-1.4 (m, 6H), 1.2-1.05 (m, 2H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 172.3, 171.7, 136.7, 129.0, 128.6, 127.3, 56.2, 52.7, 42.5, 36.9, 32.40, 32.38, 24.8.
C16H2ιNO3 (MW = 275.35); mass spectroscopy (M+Na) 298.
Step B - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-phenylglvcine
Following General Procedure II-A above using N-(cyclopentylacetyl)-L- phenylglycine methyl ester (from Step A), the title compound was prepared as a solid having a melting point of 155-158°C. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.18 in 10% methanol/dichloromethane).
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 8.60 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, IH), 7.45 (m, 5H0, 5.41 (d, J = 7.2 Hz. IH), 2.20 (m, 3H), 1.8-1.1 (m, 8H)..
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 172.3, 172.0, 137.5, 128.7, 128.1, 127.8, 56.2, 40.9, 36.8, 31.8, 24.5.
C15H19NO3 (MW = 261.32); mass spectroscopy (M+Na) 284. Example D Synthesis of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-alanine
Step A - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-alanine Methyl Ester
Following General Procedure A above using cyclopentylacetic acid (Aldrich) and L-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a solid having a melting point of 43-46°C. Purification was by recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes.
NMR data was as follows:
"H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 6.38 (d, IH), 4.50 (m, IH), 3.65 (s, 3H), 2.13 (bs, 3H), 1.80- 1.00 (m (includes d at 1.30, 3H), 11 H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.7, 172.5, 52.1, 47.6, 42.3. 36.8, 32.15, 32.14,
18.0.
CnH19NO3 (MW = 213.28); mass spectroscopy (Mff) 214.
Step B - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-alanine
Following General Procedure II-A above using N-(cyclopentylacetyl)-L- alanine methyl ester (from Step A), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.18 in 10% methanol/dichloromethane).
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (DMSO-d6): δ = 12.45 (bs, IH), 8.12 (d, J=7.2 Hz, IH), 4.24 (quint. J = 7.2 Hz, IH), 2.14 (m, 3H), 1.8-1.4 (m. 6H), 1.29 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.2-1.0 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (DMSO-d6): δ = 174.6, 171.9, 47.3, 41.1, 36.7, 31.8, 24.5, 17.2.
C10H17NO3 (MW = 199.25); mass spectroscopy (MH+) N/A.
Example E Synthesis of N-(Cyclopropylacetyl)-L-alanine
Step A - Preparation of N-(Cyclopropylacetyl)-L-alanine Methyl Ester Following General Procedure A above using cyclopropylacetic acid (Aldrich) and L-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.15 in 25%o ethyl acetate/hexanes) and purification was by flash column chromatography using 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes as the eluant.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 6.60 (d, IH), 4.55 (m, IH), 3.69 (s, 3H), 2.10 (m, 2H), 1.34 (d, 3H), 0.95 (m, IH), 0.58 (m, 2H), 0.15 (m, 2H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.7, 172.3, 52.3, 47.7, 41.0, 18.2, 6.7, 4.27, 4.22.
C9H15NO3 (MW = 185.22); mass spectroscopy (MH+) N/A.
Step B - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-alanine
Following General Procedure II-A above using N-(cyclopropylacetyl)-L- alanine methyl ester (from Step A), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.27 in 10% methanol/dichloromethane).
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (DMSO-d6): δ = 8.18 (d, lH), 4.25 (m, IH), 2.08 (m, 2H), 1.30 (d, 3H), 1.00 (m, IH), 0.50 (m, 2H), 0.19 (m, 2H).
13C-nmr (DMSO-d6): δ = 174.6. 171.7. 47.4, 17.3, 7.6, 4.12, 4.06.
C8H13NO3 (MW = 199.25); mass spectroscopy (MH+) N/A.
Example F Synthesis of N-(Cyclopropylacetyl)-L-phenylglycine
Step A - Preparation of N-(Cyclopropylacetyl)-L-glvcine Methyl Ester Following General Procedure A above using cyclopropylacetic acid (Aldrich) and L-phenylglycine methyl ester, the title compound was prepared as a solid having a melting point of 74-76 °C. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.61 in 50% ethyl acetate/hexanes) and purification was by recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes. NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.35 (m, 5H), 6.97 (bd, J=7.2 Hz, IH), 5.59 (d, J=7.8 Hz, IH), 3.71 (s, 3H), 2.17 (m, 2H), 1.05-0.95 (m, IH), 0.62 (m, 2H), 0.20 (m, 2H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 171.9, 174.6, 136.6, 129.0, 128.5, 127.2, 56.1, 52.7, 41.0, 6.9, 4.37, 4.33.
C14H17NO3 (MW = 247.30); mass spectroscopy (MH+) N/A.
Step B - Preparation of N-(Cyclopentylacetyl)-L-phenylglycine
Following General Procedure II-A above using N-(cyclopropylacetyl)-L- phenylglycine methyl ester (from Step A), the title compound was prepared as a solid having melting point of 152-157°C. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.23 in 10% methanol/dichloromethane) and purification was by recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 8.47 (d, J = 7.69 Hz, IH), 7.35 (m, 5H), 5.34 (d, J = 7.69 Hz. IH), 2.10 (m, 2H), 0.90 (m, IH), 0.40 (m, 2H), 0.10 (m, 2H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 172.3, 171.8, 137.6, 128.7. 56.2, 7.7, 4.0.
C13H15NO3 (MW = 233.27); mass spectroscopy (MHT) N/A.
Example H
Synthesis of N-(2-Biphenyl)-D,L-alanine
2-Aminobiphenyl (2 g, 11.8 mmol, Aldrich), triethylamine ( 1.2 eq.) and ethyl 2-bromopropionate (1.1 eq., Aldrich) were combined and heated to 85 °C with stirring. After 7 days, the mixture was diluted with chloroform and washed with water. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography (1 :1 CH2Cl2/hexanes). The resulting oil was dissolved in a 1 :2 mixture of water/dioxane (200 mL) and LiOH (2 eq.) was added. After 2 hours, the mixture was concentrated to yield an oil which was dissolved in water. The aqueous solution was washed with ether then was adjusted to pH 3 with 5N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc) to yield the title compound.
Example I
Synthesis of N-(Phenyl-furazan-3-yI)-D,L-alanine
Following General Procedure II-D and using 4-phenyl-furazan-3-ylamine
(Maybridge) and ethyl pyruvate (Aldrich), the ethyl ester was prepared. Following
General Procedure II-A, Method B (LiOH/H20/dioxane) and using the ethyl ester, the title compound was prepared.
Example L
Synthesis of S-(+)-3,5-Difluoromandelic Acid
Step A - Preparation of Methyl S-(±)-3.5-difluoromandelate
To a solution of 3,5-difluorobenzaldehyde (Aldrich) in CH2C12 (100 mL) was added ZnCl2 (6.7 g, 21.1 mmol) to form a slurry. Trimethysilyl cyanide (21.0 g, 211.2 mmol) dissolved in CH2C12 (100 mL) was slowly added to the slurry at
0°C. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. The reaction mixture was then diluted with water and the organic layer separated. The combined organic layers were concentrated to a residue. The residue was dissolved with MeOH (200 mL) at 0°C and anhydrous HCl gas bubbled into the solution for 10 min. After stirring at room temperature for 18 h, the solution was concentrated to a solid. The solid was dissolved in CH2C12 / H2O and the aqueous portion extracted with CH2C12. The combined organics were washed with brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to a solid (37.4 g, 87.6%), mp = 77-
78°C.
•H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 6.97 (dd, J = 9.6 Hz, J = 1.79 Hz, 2H),
6.74 (dt, J = 8.82, J = 2.28 Hz, IH), 5.14 (d, J = 4.64 Hz, IH), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.54 (d,
J = 5.1 Hz, IH). Step B - Preparation of Methyl S-(+)-3.5-difluoromandelate
Methyl (±)-3,5-difluoromandelate was separated via preparative chiral HPLC to give a white solid having a melting point of 70-71 °C.
C9H8F2O3 (MW = 202.17); mass spectroscopy found (M+NH ) 220.0. Anal, calcd for C9H8F2O3: C, 53.47; H, 3.99. Found: C, 53.40; H, 3.89.
Step C - Preparation of S-(+)-3.5-Difluoromandelic acid
A solution of methyl S-(+)-3,5-difluoromandelate (1 eq.) in 74% aqueous THF was cooled to 0 °C and treated with lithium hydroxide. After 40 minutes at 0 °C the reaction was complete by TLC. The contents were transferred to a separatory funnel and partitioned between CH2C12 and saturated aqueous NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was acidified with 0.5 N NaHSO and extracted thrice with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to a white solid having a melting point of 119-122 °C. The 'H NMR was consistent with known 3,5-difluoromandelic acid.
Example N
Synthesis of (R)-N,N'-Di-BOC-2-Hydrazinopropionic Acid
Step A: To (S)-(-)-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidanone (Aldrich) in THF cooled to -
50°C was added n-butyl lithium 1.1 eq. (1.6 M in hexane) dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to -20°C and then was re-cooled to -78°C and propionyl chloride (1.1 eq) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir an additional 15 min. at -78 °C and then was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was then quenched with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extracts were washed with water, followed by brine and then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give (S)-(-)-3-propionyl-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidanone.
Step B: To a solution of (S)-(-)-3-propionyl-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidanone in THF at -78°C was added LiHMDS (1.05 eq.) (Aldrich) dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at -78 °C for 30 min. and then a precooled solution of di-tert-butyl-azodicarboxylate (Aldrich) was added via a cannula. After 5 min. 2.6 eq. of acetic acid was added. The reaction mixture was then extracted with dichloromethane and the organic layer was washed with 1M potassium phosphate. The organic layer was then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give (S)-(-)-3-[(R)-N,N'-di-BOC-2-hydrazinopropionyl]-4-benzyl-2- oxazolidanone.
Step C: To the product from Step B (1.0 g, 2.16 mM) in THF (34 mL) and water (13 mL), cooled to 0°C, was added a 30% solution of H2O2 (0.734 mL, 6.4 mM) and LiOH (57 mg, 2.37 mM). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 1.5 h and then quenched with 1.5 N Na2SO3 (15 mL). A saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate (48 mL) was added and the mixture was pardoned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueous layer was acidified with 10% citric acid and extracted into dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to give the title compound (390 mg, 60%) as a colorless glass which was used without further purification.
Example O
Synthesis of 3,5-Difluorophenyl-α-oxoacetic Acid
Step A: Ethyl 3,5-difluorophenyl-α-oxoacetate was prepared from 1- bromo-3.5-difluorobenzene (Aldrich) according to the procedure described in J.
Org. Chem., 45 (14), 2883-2887 (1980).
Step B: Ethyl 3,5-difluorophenyl-α-oxoacetate was hydrolyzed using General Procedure II-A (Method B) to afford 3,5-difluorophenyl-α-oxoacetic acid. Example P
Synthesis of Cyclopentyl-α-hydroxyacetic Acid
The title compound (CAS No. 6053-71-0) was prepared in two steps from cyclopentylmethanal (CAS No. 872-53-7, Wiley) using the procedure described by
Gibby, W. A.; Gubler, C. J. Biochemical Medicine 1982, 27, 15-25.
Example Q Synthesis of N-(3,4-Dichlorophenyl)alanine
Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety, N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)alanine was prepared. Specifically, to a solution of 3,4- dichloroaniline (1 equivalent) (Aldrich) in isopropanol (about 500 mL per mole of 3,4-dichloroaniline) is added water (about 0.06 mL per mL of isopropanol) and 2- chloropropionic acid (2 equivalents) (Aldrich). This mixture is warmed to 40 °C and sodium bicarbonate (0.25 equivalents) is added in successive portions before heating under reflux for 4-5 days. After cooling, the reaction mixture is poured into water and the unreacted 3,4-dichloroaniline is removed by filtration. The filtrate is acidified to pH 3-4 with concentrated hydrochloric acid and the resultant precipitate is filtered, washed and dried to yield the title compound, m.p. = 148- 149°C.
Example R Synthesis of N-(3,5-Difluorophenyl)alanine
Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859 and Example Q above, N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanine was prepared using 3,5-difluoroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich). Example S
Synthesis of α-Fluoro-3,5-difluorophenylacetic Acid
Step A - Synthesis of Methyl 3,5-Difluoromandelate
To a solution of 3,5-difluoromandelic acid (Fluorochem) in methanol was bubbled HCl gas for 10 minutes. The reaction was refluxed overnight. The mixture was then concentrated in vacuo and the residue was taken up in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to give the title intermediate as a white solid.
C9H8F2O3 (MW=202.17); mass spectroscopy 202.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.00 (2H, d, J=6.58 Hz), 6.76 (IH, t, J=8.86 Hz), 5.16 (IH, d, J=5.29 Hz), 3.81 (3H, s), 3.54 (IH, d, J=5.39 Hz).
Step B - Synthesis of Methyl α-Fluoro-3,5-difluorophenylacetate
A solution of diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST) (1.1 eq) in methylene chloride was cooled to 0°C and a pre-cooled solution of methyl 3,5- difluoromandelate ( 1 eq) in methylene chloride was added. The transfer flask was rinsed with a small portion of methylene chloride. After 15 minutes, the cooling bath was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred an additional 40 minutes at ambient temperature. The mixture was poured over ice and the layers separated. The organic phase was washed with saturated NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via HPLC eluting with 7% ethyl acetate/hexanes providing the title intermediate as a yellow oil.
C9H7F3O2 (MW=204.16); mass spectroscopy 204.
Anal, calcd for C9H7F3O2: C, 52.95; H. 3.46. Found: C, 52.80; H, 3.73. Step C - Synthesis of α-Fluoro-3,5-difluorophenylacetic Acid
Following General Procedure II-A, Method B and using methyl α-fluoro- 3,5-difluorophenylacetate, the title intermediate was prepared as a white solid having a melting point of 100-102°C.
CgHjFjO, (MW = 190.13); mass spectroscopy 190.
Anal, calcd for C8H5F3O2: C, 50.54; H, 2.65. Found: C, 50.47; H, 2.79.
Additionally, various other amino acid derivatives suitable for use in this invention are disclosed in PCT Publication No. WO 98/22430 and WO 98/22493, both published on May 28, 1998. the disclosures of which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety.
III. Cyclic Compounds
The following procedures illustrate the synthesis of various cyclic compound intermediates useful for preparing compounds of this invention:
A. Benzazepinone Derivatives and Related Compounds
GENERAL PROCEDURE 6-A
Alkylation of 1 -Amino- 1.3.4.5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2-one
Step A: l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2- one was prepared according to the procedure of Ben-Ishai et al., Tetrahedron,
1987, 43, 430.
Step B: l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2-one (2.0 g, 100 M%) was dissolved in DMF (30 mL) and NaH (95%, 0.17 g, 100M%) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour and then the appropriate alkyl iodide (300M%) was added and the mixture was stirred for 12 hours. The reaction was poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x). The ethyl acetate extracts were then washed with water (3x) and brine (lx). Treatment with MgSO4, rotoevaporation, and chromotography (30% EtOAc/hexanes) yielded l-ethoxycarbonylamino-3-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3- benzazepin-2-one in 87% yield.
Step C: l-Ethoxycarbonylamino-3-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-3- benzazepin-2-one (l .Og, 100M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 30% HBr/HOAc and heated to 100°C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hours at this temperature and then the reaction was cooled and rotoevaporated to yield l-amino-3-alkyl- 1,3,4, 5-tetrahydro-2H-3-benzazepin-2-one as the hydrobromide salt (100% yield).
GENERAL PROCEDURE 6-B
Alkylation of 3-Amino-1.3.4.5-tetrahvdro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one
Step A: 3-Amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from α-tetralone using the methods described in Armstrong et al. Tetrahedron Letters, 1994, 35, 3239. The following compounds were as prepared by this procedure for use in the following steps:
5-methy 1-3-amino- 1 , 3 ,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one (from 4- methyl-α-tetralone (Aldrich)); and
5 ,5-dimethy 1-3-amino- 1 , 3 ,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one (from 4,4-dimethyul-α-tetralone (Aldrich)) .
Step B: 3-Amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one (4.43 g, 100M%) was suspended in t-butanol (30mL) and BOC-anhydride (7.5 mL, 130M%) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 2 hours and then it was rotoevaporated to a residue which was chromatographed with 60% ethyl acetate/hexanes to yield BOC-protected 3-amino-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one in 87% yield.
Step C: BOC-protected 3-amino-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2- one (1.5 g, 100M%) was dissolved in DMF (20mL) and NaH (95%, 0.13g, 100M%) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour and then the appropriate alkyl iodide (300M%) was added and stirring was continued for 12 hours. The reaction was poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x). The ethyl acetate extracts were washed with water (3x) and then brine (lx). Treatment with MgSO4, rotoevaporation, and chromotography (30% EtOAc/hexanes) yielded a BOC-protected 3-amino- 1 -alkyl- 1, 3,4,5- tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one in 80% yield.
Step D: The BOC-protected 3-amino-l-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (l.Og, 100M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 1 : 1 CH2Cl2/triflouroacetic acid and the mixmre was stirred for 4 hours. The reaction was then rotoevaporated to yield the 3-amino-l-alkyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100% yield).
Example 6-A
Synthesis of 3-Amino-l,5-dimethyI-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one
Step A : 3- Amino-5-methy 1- 1 ,3,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one was prepared from 4-methyl-α-tetralone using the methods described in
Armstrong et al. Tetrahedron Letters, 1994, 35, 3239.
Step B: 3-Amino-5-methy 1- 1 , 3 ,4 , 5-tetrahydro-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one (9.3g 100M%) was dissolved in dioxane (300mL) and the solution was chilled to 0°C. BOC-anhydride (13.89g 130M%) was added and the ice bath was removed allowing the solution to come to room temperature and stirring was continued for 16 hours. The solution was rotory evaporated to remove dioxane to provide an off white solid. This solid was recrystallized from CHCk to yield BOC- protected 3-amino-5-methyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one in 55 % yield. Step C: BOC-protected 3-amino-5-methyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100 M%) was dissolved in DMF (20mL) and NaH (95%, 100 M%) was added in one portion and the reaction mixmre was stirred for 1 hour. Methyl iodide (300 M%) was added and this mixmre was stirred for 12 hours. The reaction was then poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x) then backwashed with water (3x) and then brine (lx). Treatment with MgSO4, rotoevaporation, and chromotography (5 % MeOH/CH2Cl2) yielded BOC- protected 3-amino-l ,5-dimethyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one in 75% yield.
Step D: BOC-protected 3-amino-l,5-dimethyl-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l- benzazepin-2-one (100 M%) was suspended in 30 mL of 1 : 1 CH2Cl2/triflouroacetic acid. The reaction mixmre was stirred for 4 hours. The reaction was then rotoevaporated to yield 3-amino-l ,5-dimethyl-l ,3,4,5- tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one (100% yield).
Example 6-B
Synthesis of
5-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-3,3,7-trimethyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-3,3,7- trimethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (Example 6-C), the title compound was prepared.
Example 6-C
Synthesis of
5-Amino-3,3>7-trimethyl-5,7-dihydro- 6H-benz [b] azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A: Following General Procedure 5-A and using N-t-Boc-5-amino-
3,3-dimethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one (General Procedure 6-B, following by Boc protection) and methyl iodide, N-t-Boc-5-amino-3,3,7- trimethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one was prepared. Step B: Following General Procedure 8-N and using N-t-Boc-5-amino- 3,3,7-trimethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-benz[b]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared.
Example 6-D
Synthesis of
3-(S)-Amino-l-methyl-5-oxa-l,3»4,5- tetrahy dr o-2H- 1 -benzazepin-2-one
Step A: 3-(S)-Amino-5-oxa-l ,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from N-Boc-serine (Bachem) and 2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (Aldrich) using the method of R. J. DeVita et al., Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry
Lett. 1995, 5(12) 1281-1286.
Step B: Following General Procedure 5-A and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
Example 6-E
Synthesis of 3-(S)-Amino-l-ethyl-5-oxa-l,3 5- tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one
Step A: 3-(S)-Amino-5-oxa-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one was prepared from N-Boc-serine (Bachem) and 2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (Aldrich) using the method of R. J. DeVita et al. , Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry
Lett. 1995, 5(12) 1281-1286.
Step B: Following General Procedure 5-A and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared. Example 6-F
Synthesis of 3-(S)-Amino-l-methyl-5-thia-l,3,4,5- tetrahydro-2H-l-benzazepin-2-one
The title compound was prepared from N-Boc-cystine (Novabio) and 2- fluoro-1 -nitrobenzene (Aldrich) using the method of R. J. DeVita et al., Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Lett. 1995, 5(12) 1281-1286, followed by General Procedure 5-A.
Example 6-G
Synthesis of
7-Amino-l,3,4,7,12,12a-hexahydropyrido[2,l-b][3]- benzazepin-6(2H)-one
Step A - Synthesis of N-Chloroacetyl-2-benzylpiperidine
Following General Procedure F and using 2-benzylpyridine, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
(MW = 251.8); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 252.0.
Step B - Synthesis of 1.3.4.7.12.12a-hexahvdropyridor2.1- b] r31benzazepin-6(2H)-one Following General Procedure G and using N-chloroacetyl-2- benzylpiperidine, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 1.3-1.9 (6H); 2.42 (t, IH); 3.08 (m, 2H); 3.47 (m, IH); 3.96 (q, 2H); 4.66 (d, IH); 7.2 (m, 4H).
(MW = 215.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 216.1.
Step C - Synthesis of 7-Oximo-l .3.4.7.12.12a- hexahydropyrido[2.1-b]|"31benzazepin-6(2H)-one Following General Procedure A (Step B) and using 1,3,4,7,12,12a- hexahydropyrido[2,l-b][3]benzazepin-6(2H)-one (from Step B), the title compound was prepared. Physical data were as follows:
(MW = 244.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 245.0.
Step D - Synthesis of 7-Amino-1.3.4.7.12.12a- hexahydropyridor2.1-b][31benzazepin-6(2H)-one Following General Procedure A (Step C) and using 7-oximo- l,3,4,7,12,12a-hexahydropyrido[2,l-b][3]benzazepin-6(2H)-one (from Step C), the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 1.3-1.9 (6H); 2.42 (t, IH); 3.08 (m, 2H); 3.47 (m, IH); 3.96 (q,2H); 4.66 (d,lH); 7.2 (m,4H).
(MW = 230.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 231.1.
Example 6-H
Synthesis of
1 -(N ' -L- Alaniny 1) amino-4, 5 , 6 , 7-tetr any dro-
3,7-methano-3H-3-benzazonin-2(lH)-one
Step A - Synthesis of N-Chloroacetyl-3-phenylpiperidine
Following General Procedure F and using 3-phenylpyridine hydrochloride
(Aldrich). the title compound was prepared.
Step B - Synthesis of 4.5.6.7-Tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-3- benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure G and using N-chloroacetyl-3- phenylpiperidine, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): d = 1.32-1.57 (2H); 2.08 (m, 2H); 2.81 (t, IH); 3.13 (bs, IH); 3.37 (m, 2H); 4.36 (m, 2H); 4.50 (d, IH).
(MW = 201.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 202.1. Step C - Synthesis of l-Oximo-4.5.6.7-tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-
3-benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure A (Step B) and using the product from Step
B, the title compound was prepared.
Step D - Synthesis of l-Amino-4.5.6.7-tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-
3-benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure A (Step C) and using the product from Step
C, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 2.86 (t. IH); 3.17 (bs, IH); 3.39 (dd, IH); 4.40 (d, IH); 4.50 (d, IH); 5.39 (s, IH).
(MW = 216.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 217.4.
Step E - Synthesis of l-fN'-Boc-L-Alaninyl)amino-4.5.6.7- tetrahydro-3.7-methano-3H-3-benzazonin-2(lH)-one Following General Procedure D and using N-tert-Boc-L-alanine (Aldrich) and the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
(MW = 387.48); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 388.1.
Step F - Synthesis of l-(A-L-Alaninyl)amino-4.5.6.7-tetrahydro-
3.7-methano-3 H-3 -benzazonin-2( 1 HVone Following General Procedure E and using the product from Step E, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 2.85 (t, IH); 3.16 (bs, IH); 3.40 (dd, IH); 3.67 (m, IH); 4.35 (d, IH); 4.56 (d, IH); 6.40 (d, IH).
(MW = 287.4); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 288.1. B. Dibenzazepinone Derivatives and Related Compounds
GENERAL PROCEDURE 7- A
Preparation of
5-Amino-7-alkyl-5 ,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b.dlazepin-6-one Derivatives
Step A: Following General Procedure 5-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one and an alkyl halide, the 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
Step B: The 7-alkyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1 eq.) was dissolved in THF and isoamylnitrite (1.2 eq.) was added. The mixmre was cooled to 0°C in an ice bath. NaHMDS (1.1 eq., 1M in THF) was added dropwise. After stirring for 1 hour or until the reaction was complete, the mixmre was concentrated then acidified with IN HCl and extracted with EtOAc. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield a crude product which was purified by silica gel chromatography.
Step C: The resulting oxime was dissolved in EtOH/NH3 (20: 1) and hydrogenated in a bomb using Raney nickel and hydrogen (500 psi) at 100°C for 10 hours. The resulting mixmre was filtered and concentrated to provide an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography to yield the title compound.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 7-B
Preparation of Fluoro-substituted 5 ,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Derivatives
A modification of the procedure of Robin D. Clark and Jahangir,
Tetrahedron, Vol. 49, No. 7, pp. 1351-1356, 199315 was used. Specifically, an appropriately substimted N-t-Boc-2-amino-2'-methylbiphenyl was dissolved in
THF and cooled to -78°C. s-Butyl lithium (1.3M in cyclohexane, 2.2 eq.) was added slowly so that the temperamre remained below -65 °C. The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to -25 °C and was stirred at that temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was cooled to -78°C. Dry CO, was bubbled through the mixture for 30 seconds. The mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperamre then was carefully quenched with water. The mixmre was concentrated under reduced pressure then was adjusted to pH 3 with IN HCl. The mixmre was extracted with EtOAc and the organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield a crude material. The crude material was dissolved in methanol and the solution was saturated with HCl. The mixture was heated at reflux for 12 hours then was allowed to cool. The mixture was concentrated to provide crude lactam which was purified by chromatography or crystallization.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 7-C
Resolution of 5-Amino-7-methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d1azepin-6-one
In a round bottom flask was added the racemic freebase amine (1.0 eq.) in methanol followed by di- ?-toluoyl-D-tartaric acid monohydrate (1.0 eq.). The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to a residue and redissolved in a moderate volume of methanol and allowed to stir at room temperamre open to the atmosphere (8-72 hours). The solid was removed by filtration. The enantiomeric excess was determined by chiral HPLC (Chiracel ODR) using 15 % acetonitrile and 85 % H2O with 0.1 % trifluoroacetic acid and a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min at 35°C. The resolved di- -toluoyl-D-tartaric salt was then dissolved in
EtOAc and saturated NaHCO3 until pH 9-10 was reached. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed again with saturated NaHCO,, H2O, and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSQ, and the drying agent was removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The free amine was dissolved in MeOH and HCl (12M, 1.0 eq.) was added. The salt was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting film was triturated with EtOAc. The HCl salt was filtered and rinsed with EtOAc. The ee was determined by chiral
HPLC. Example 7-A
Synthesis of
5- Amino-7-methy 1-5 , 7-dihy dro-
6H-dibenz [b , d] azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A - Synthesis of 7-Methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenzrb.dlazepin-6-one
A round bottom flask was charged with sodium hydride (0.295 g, 7.46 mmol) in 9.0 ml of DMF and treated with 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6- one (1.3 g, 6.22 mmol) (CAS # 20011-90-9, prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron Letters. No. 8, 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein). After stirring at 60 °C for 1 h, the solution was treated with methyl iodide (1.16 ml, 18.6 mmol) and stirring continued for 17 h with the exclusion of light. After cooling, the reaction was diluted with CH2Cl2/H2O, washed with NaHSO4 solution, H2O, and dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation and flash chromatography (SiO2, CHC1J gave 0.885 g (63 %) of the title compound as a colorless solid.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 7.62 (d, 2H), 7.26-7.47 (m, 6H), 3.51 (m, 2H), 3.32 (s, 3H).
C15H13NO (MW = 223.27); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 223.
Anal. Calcd for C15H13NO; C, 80.69 H, 5.87 N. 6.27. Found: C. 80.1 1 H, 5.95 N, 6.23.
Step B - Synthesis of 7-Methyl-5-oximo-5.7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
The compound isolated above (0.700 g, 3.14 mmol) was dissolved in 20 ml of toluene and treated with butyl nitrite (0.733 ml. 6.28 mmol). The reaction temperature was lowered to 0°C and the solution was treated with KHMDS (9.42 ml, 0.5 M) under N2 atmosphere. After stiπing for 1 h the reaction was quenched with a saturated solution of NaHSO4, diluted with CH2C12 and separated. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and the title compound purified by chromatography (SiO2, 98:2 CHCl3/MeOH) giving 0.59 g (80 %) as a colorless solid. C15H,2N2O2(MW = 252.275); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 252. Anal. Calcd for C15H12N2O2; C, 71.42 H, 4.79 N, 11.10. Found: C, 71.24 H, 4.69 N, 10.87.
Step C - Synthesis of 5-Amino-7-Methyl-5.7-dihvdro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The oxime isolated above (0.99 g, 3.92 mmol) was hydrogenated in a Parr apparatus at 35 psi over 10 % Pd/C (0.46 g) in 3 A ethanol. After 32 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of celite, the filtrate evaporated to a foam and treated with a saturated solution of HCl (g) in Et2O. The resulting colorless solid was filtered, rinsed with cold Et2O and vacuum dried to give 0.66 g (61 %) of the title compound.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (DMSOdό): δ = 9.11 (bs, 3H), 7.78-7.41(m, 8H), 4.83 (s, IH), 3.25 (s, 3H).
C15H]4N2O HCl (MW = 274.753); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 238.
Anal. Calcd for Cl5H14N2O HCl; C, 65.57 H. 5.50 N, 10.19 Found: C, 65.27 H. 5.67 N, 10.13.
Example 7-B
Synthesis of
(S)- and (R)-5-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Step A - Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(N-Boc-L-Alaninyl)-amino-7- methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
Boc-L-Alanine (0.429 g, 2.26 mmol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.305 g, 2.26 mmol). and 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (0.45 g, 1.89 mmol) (Example 7-A). The temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.449 g, 2.26 mmol) (Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N2. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H2O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO3, brine and dried over Na2SO4. The diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA/heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
Isomer 1: Retention time 3.37 minutes.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 7.62-7.33 (m, 9H), 5.26 (d, IH), 5.08 (m, IH), 4.34 (m, IH), 3.35 (s, 3H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 1.40 (d, 3H).
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 96 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C23H27N3O4 (MW = 409.489); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 409.
Anal. Calcd for C23H27N3O4; C, 67.46 H, 6.64 N, 10.26. Found: C, 68.42 H, 7.02 N, 9.81.
Isomer 2: Retention time 6.08 minutes.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 7.74 (bd,1 H), 7.62-7.32 (m, 8H), 5.28 (d, IH), 4.99 (m, IH), 4.36 (m, IH), 3.35 (s, 3H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 1.46 (d, 3H).
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 69 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C23H27N3O4 (MW = 409.489); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 409.
Anal. Calcd for C23H27N3O4; C, 67.46 H, 6.64 N, 10.26. Found: C, 67.40 H. 6.62 N, 10.02
Step B - Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-methyl-
5.7-dihvdro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compounds isolated in Part A (each isomer separately) were dissolved in dioxane and treated with excess HCl (g). After stirring for 17 hours, the title compounds were isolated as colorless solids after evaporation and vacuum drying.
Isomer 1 :
C18H19N3O2.HCl (MW = 345.832); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base)
309.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 55 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH). Isomer 2: C,8H,9N3O2.HCl (MW = 345.832); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 309.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 80 @ 589 nm (c = 1. MeOH).
Example 7-C
Synthesis of
(S)- and (R)-5-(L-ValinyI)-amino-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Step A - Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(N-Boc-L-Valinyl)-amino-7- methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
Boc-L-Valine (0.656 g, 3.02 mmol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.408, 3.02 mmol), Dipea (1.05 ml, 6.05 mmol) and 5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (0.75 g, 2.75 mmol)(Example 7-A). The temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.601 g, 3.02 mmol)(Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N2. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H2O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO3, brine and dried over Na2SO4. The diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA/heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
Isomer 1 : Retention time 3.23 minutes.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 120 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C25H31N3O4 (MW = 437.544); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 438
Isomer 2: Retention time 6.64 minutes.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 50 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C25H31N3O4 (MW = 437.544); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 438
Step B - Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(L-Valinyl)-amino-7-methyl-
5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compounds isolated in Part A (each isomer separately) were dissolved in dioxane and treated with excess HCl (g). After stirring for 17 hours, the title compounds were isolated as colorless solids after evaporation and vacuum drying.
Isomer 1 : C20H23N3O2.HC1 (MW = 373.88); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 338.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 38 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
Isomer 2:
C20H23N3O2.HC1 (MW = 373.88); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 338.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 97 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
Example 7-D
Synthesis of
(S)- and (R)-5-(L-tert-Leucine)-amino-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Step A - Synthesis of (S)- and (R)-5-(N-Boc-L-tert-Leucinyl)-amino-
7-methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
Boc-L-tert-Leucine (0.698 g, 3.02 mmol) (Fluka) was dissolved in THF and treated with HOBt hydrate (0.408, 3.02 mmol), Dipea (1.05 ml, 6.05 mmol) and 5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (0.75 g, 2.75 mmol)(Example 7-A). The temperature was lowered to 0°C and the reaction mixture treated with EDC (0.601 g, 3.02 mmol) (Alrich) and stirred 17 hours under N2. The reaction mixture was evaporated, the residue diluted with EtOAc/H2O, washed 1.0 N HCl, sat. NaHCO3, brine and dried over Na2SO . The diastereomers were separated on a Chiralcel OD column using 10% IPA heptane at 1.5 ml/minute.
Isomer 1 : Retention time 3.28minutes.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 128 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C26H33N3O4 (MW = 451.571); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 452
Isomer 2: Retention time 5.52 minutes.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 26 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
C26H33N3O4 (MW = 451.571); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 452 Step B - Synthesis of (S and (R)-5-(L-tert-Leucinyl)-amino-7- methyl-5.7-dihvdro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compounds isolated in Part A (each isomer separately) were dissolved in dioxane and treated with excess HCl (g). After stirring for 17 hours, the title compounds were isolated as colorless solids after evaporation and vacuum drying.
Isomer 1 :
C21H25N3O2.HCl (MW = 387.91); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 352.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = - 34 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
Isomer 2:
C21H25N3O2.HCl (MW = 387.91); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 352.
Optical Rotation: [α]20 = 108 @ 589 nm (c = 1, MeOH).
Example 7-E
Synthesis of 5-(N-Boc-Amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H,7H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Step A - Synthesis of 5-Iodo-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6- one
A solution of 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1.0 g, 4.77 mmol)
(Example 7-A) and Et3N ( 2.66 ml. 19.12 mmol) were stirred for 5.0 minutes at -
15°C in CH2CL and treated with TMSI (1.36 ml, 9.54 mmol). After stirring for 15 minutes L (1.81 g. 7.16 mmol) was added in a single portion and the reaction allowed to warm to 5-10 °C over 3 h. The reaction was quenched with sat. Na2SO3, diluted with CH2CL and separated. The organics were washed with Na2SO3 and
NaHSO3 and dried over MgSO4. After filtration, the organics were concentrated to approximately 20 ml and diluted with an additional 20 ml of hexanes. The title compound was isolated as a tan precipitate by filtration. Step B - Synthesis of 5-Azido-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6- one The iodide isolate above was dissolved in DMF and treated with 1.2 equivalents of NaN3. After stirring 17 h at 23 °C the mixture was diluted with
EtOAc/H2O, separated, washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. The title compound was triturated from hot EtOAc as a tan powder.
Step C - Synthesis of 5-(N-Boc-Amino)-5.7-dihvdro-6H.7H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
The azide was dissolved in THF/H2O and stirred at 23 °C for 17 h in the presence of 3.0 equivalents of Ph3P. The reaction was diluted with 50 %
HO Ac/toluene, separated, the aqueous layer extracted with toluene and evaporated to an oily residue. This was taken to pH 7.0 by the addition of 1 N NaOH, the resulting HOAc salt was collected and vacuum dried. Finally, the compound was treated with Boc anhydride (1.05 equivalents) and Et3N (2.1 equivalents) in THF.
After stirring for 5 h at 23 °C the reaction was filtered and the title compound isolated as a colorless powder.
Example 7-F
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-(2-methylpropyl)-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A - Synthesis of 5-(N-Boc-Amino)-7-(2-methylpropyl)-5.7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
A solution of 5-(N-Boc-amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-
6-one (0.2g, 0.617 mmol) (Example 7-E) in DMF was treated with Cs2CO3 (0.22 g,
0.678 mmol) and warmed to 60 °C. To the reaction mixture was added l-iodo-2- methylpropane (0.078 ml, 0.678 mmol) and stirring continued for 17 h. After cooling to 23 °C the mixture was diluted with CH2CL, washed with several portions of brine and dried over Na2SO4. The title compound was purified by chromatography (SiO2, CHCl3/MeOH 9:1).
C23H28N2O3 (MW = 380.41); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 381 Anal. Calcd for C23H28N2O3; C, 72.61 H, 7.42 N, 7.36. Found: C. 72.31 H, 7.64 N, 7.17.
Step B - Synthesis of 5-Amino-7-(2-methylpropyl)-5.7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compound isolated in Part A was deprotected in dioxane saturated with gaseous HCl. The title compound was isolated as a slightly colored solid after evaporation and vacuum drying.
Example 7-G
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-(methoxyacetyl)-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A- Synthesis of 5-(N-Boc-Amino)-7-(methoxyacetyl)-5.7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
A solution of 5-(N-Boc-amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
(1.03. 3.08 mmol) (Example 7-E) in DMF was treated with Cs2CO3 (1.10 g, 3.39 mmol) and warmed to 60°C. To the reaction mixture was added bromomethyl acetate (0.321 ml. 3.39 mmol) (Aldrich) and stirring continued for 17 h. After cooling to 23 °C the mixture was diluted with CH2CL, washed with several portions of brine and dried over Na2SO4. The title compound was purified by chromatography (SiO2, CHC1J.
C22H24N2O5 (MW = 396.44); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 397
Anal. Calcd for C22H24N2O5; C, 66.65 H, 6.10 N, 7.07. Found: C, 66.28 H,
5.72 N, 6.50.
Step B - Synthesis of 5-Amino-7-(methoxyacetyl)-5.7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compound isolated in Part A was deprotected in dioxane saturated with gaseous HCl. The title compound was isolated as a colorless solid after evaporation and vacuum drying. C17H16N2O3 HCl (MW = 332.78); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base) 297.
Example 7-H
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-(3,3-dimethyl-2-butanonyl)-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d] azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A- Synthesis of 5-rN-Boc-Amino)-7-(3.3-dimethyl-butanonyD-
5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
A solution of 5-(N-Boc-amino)-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (0.2 g, 0.617 mmol) (Example 7-E) in DMF was treated with Cs2CO3 (0.3 g, 0.925 mmol) and warmed to 60° C. To the reaction mixture was added l-chloro-3,3- dimethyl-2-butanone (0.096 ml, 0.74 mmol) (Aldrich) and stirring continued for 17 h. After cooling to 23 °C, the mixture was diluted with CH2CL, washed with several portions of brine and dried over Na2SO4. The title compound was isolated as a colorless solid.
C25H30N2O4 (MW = 422.522); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 423
Step B - Synthesis of 5-Amino-7-(3.3-dimethyl-2-butanonyl)-5.7- dihvdro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
The compound isolated in Part A was deprotected in dioxane saturated with gaseous HCl. The title compound was isolated as a colorless solid after evaporation and vacuum drying.
Example 7-1
Synthesis of L-AlaninyI-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro- 6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A: Following General Procedure D and using N-t-Boc-L-alanine and
5-amino-7-methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, N-t-Boc-L-alaninyl-5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
Step B: Following General Procedure 8-N and using the N-t-Boc-L- alaninyl-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared. Other substituted N-t-Boc-L-alaninyl-5-amino-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones can also be prepared by this procedure.
Example 7-J
Synthesis of
L-Valinyl-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d] azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A: Following General Procedure D and using N-t-Boc-L-valine and
5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, N-t-Boc-L-valinyl-5- amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
Step B: Following General Procedure 8-N and using the N-t-Boc-L- valinyl-5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared. Other substituted N-t-Boc-L-valinyl-5-amino-7-mefhyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-ones can also be prepared by this procedure.
Example 7-K
Synthesis of 5-Amino-7-phenbutyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5.7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al, Tetrahedron
Letters. No. 8, 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein) and l-chloro-4- phenylbutane (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-L
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-cyclopropymethyl-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d] azepin-6-one
Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron
Letters. No. 8, 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein) and
(bromomethyl)cyclopropane (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared. Example 7-M
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-(2',2',2'-trifluoroethyI)-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron
Letters. No. 8, 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein) and l-bromo-2,2,2- trifluoroethane (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-N
Synthesis of
5-Amino-7-cyclohexyl-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron
Letters. No. 8, 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein) and bromocyclohexane (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-0
Synthesis of
5-(L-Alaninyl)amino-9-fluoro-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step 1 : 2-Bromo-5-fluorotoluene was stirred in THF at -78C. s-BuLi (1.05 eq., 1.3 M in cyclohexane) was slowly added and the mixture was stirred for 45 minutes. Trimethylborate ( 1.5 eq) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature. After stiπing for 1 hour, pinacol (2 eq.) was added.
The mixture was stiπed for 16 hours then was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was slurried in CH2CL and filtered through Celite.
The filtrate was concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by chromatography on deactivated silica gel (Et3N) to yield the arylboronate ester. Step 2: 2-Bromoaniline (1 eq.) and di-t-butyl-dicarbonate (1.1 eq.) were stirred at 80 °C for 20 hours. The resulting mixture was allowed to cool and was directly distilled using house vacuum to provide N-t-Boc-2-bromoaniline.
Step 3 : N-t-Boc-2-bromoaniline (Step 2, 1 eq.), the arylboronate ester (Step 1, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (1.1 eq.) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.02 eq) were stirred in 20% water/dioxane under nitrogen. The solution was heated at reflux for 10 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool then was concentrated. The resulting residue was partitioned between water and chloroform. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography using 1 : 1 CH2CL/hexanes.
Step 4: Following General Procedure 7-B and using the substituted biphenyl from step 3, the 9-fluoro-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared.
Step 5: 9-Fluoro-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1 eq., Step 4), cesium carbonate (1.1 eq., Aldrich) and methyl iodide (1.1 eq., Aldrich) were stirred in dry DMF at ambient temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide a residue which was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The organic portion was dried and concentrated to yield an oil which was purified by silica gel chromatography to 9-fluoro-7-mefhyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one.
Step 6: Following General Procedure 7-A, Step B and 9-fluoro-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one from Step 5, 5-amino-9-fluoro-7-methyl- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared. Step 7: Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-9- fluoro-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one from Step 6, the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-P
Synthesis of
5-(L-Alaninyl)amino-13-fluoro-7-methyI-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-0 and using 2-bromo-4- fluoroaniline (Step 2, Lancaster) and o-tolylboronic acid (Step 3, Aldrich), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-Q
Synthesis of 5-(L-Alaninyf)amino-10-fluoro-7-methyI- 5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-0 and using 2-bromo-4- fluorotoluene (Step 1), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-R
Synthesis of
5-(L-Alanyl)-amino-7-cyclopropylmethyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-7- cyclopropylmethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-L), the title compound was prepared. Example 7-S
Synthesis of
5-(L-Alaninyl)amino-7-phenbutyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-1 and using 5-amino-7-phenbutyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-K), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-T
Synthesis of
5-(L-Valinyl)amino-7-cyclopropylmethyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-7- cyclopropylmethyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-L), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-U
Synthesis of
5-(L-ValinyI)amino-7-phenbutyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-7-phenbutyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one (Example 7-U), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-V
Synthesis of
5-(L-VaIinyl)amino-7-hexyl-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Step A: Following General Procedure 7-A and using 5,7-dihydro-6FI- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (prepared as described in Brown, et. al., Tetrahedron
Letters. No. 8. 667-670, (1971) and references cited therein) and 1-bromohexane
(Aldrich), 5-amino-7-hexyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one was prepared. Step B: Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-7- hexyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one, the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-W
Synthesis of
5-(L-Valinyl)amino-10-fluoro-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using 5-amino-10-fluoro-7- mefhyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (as prepared in Example T ^-Q), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-X
Synthesis of
5-(L-VaIinyl)amino-13-fluoro-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using the 5-amino-13-fluoro-
7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one (as prepared in Example 7-P), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-Y
Synthesis of
5-(L-Valinyl)amino-13-fluoro-7-methyl-
5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d|azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following the procedure of Example 7-J and using the 5-amino-9-fluoro-7- methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (as prepared in Example 7-O), the title compound was prepared.
Example 7-Z
Synthesis of
(5-Amino-7-methyI-l,2,3,4,5,7-hexahydro-
6H-dicyclohexyl[b,d]azepin-6-one
The 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one hydrochloride (Example 7-A) was dissolved in a 1 :1 mixture of EtOAc/HOAc. 5% Rh/C was added and the mixture was stirred at 60 °C under 60 psi of hydrogen. After 3 days, the mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to provide an oil which was purified by SCX-cation exchange chromatography to yield the title compound.
Example 7-AA
Synthesis of 5-(S)-Amino-7-methyl-5,7-ιlihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 7-C using racemic 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (1.0 eq.) and di-p-toluoyl-D-tartaric acid monohydrate (1.0 eq.) in methanol, the title compound was prepared as a solid. The product was collected by filtration. Enantiomeric excess was determined by chiral HPLC.
Desired enantiomer 1 : retention time of 9.97 minutes.
Undesired enantiomer 2: retention time of 8.62 minutes.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 9.39 (s, 2H). 7.75-7.42 (m, 8H). 4.80 (s, IH), 3.30 (s, 3H).
C15H1SC1N20 (MW = 274.75); mass spectroscopy (MH^) 239.1.
Anal Calcd for C15H,5C1N203; C, 65.57; H, 5.50; N, 10.20; Found: C, 65.51. H, 5.61 ; N, 10.01.
Example 7-AB
Synthesis of 9-Amino-5,6-dihydro-4H-quino[8,l-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one
Hydrochlororide
Step A - Synthesis of 8-Phenylquinoline
A degassed solution of 8-bromoquinoline (1.0 g, 4.81 mmol) (Aldrich) in dioxane (50 mL)/H2O (10 mL) was treated with phenylboronic acic (0.64 g, 5.29 mmol) (Aldrich), Pd(Ph3P)4 (0.050 g, 0.04 mmol) and K2CO3 (0.73 g, 5.29 mmol). After refluxing for 4 h under a N2 atmosphere the reaction was allowed to cool, diluted with EtOAc and separated. After drying over Na2SO4 and SiO2 chromatography (95:5 Hexanes/EtOAc) the titled compound was isolated as a colorless oil.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC1J: δ = 8.97 (d, IH), 8.22 (dd, IH), 7.87-7.39 (m, 9H).
C15HπN (MW = 205); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 206.
Step B - Synthesis of 8-Phenyl-l ,2.3.4-tetrahydroquinoline
The product from Step A (0.99 g, 4.82 mmol) was hydrogenated according to the procedure described by Honel, M, et. al., J.C.S. Perkin I, (1980), 1933-1938.
Physical data were as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCLJ: δ = 7.46 (m, 3H), 7.38 (m, 2H), 6.98 (m, 2H), 6.70 (m, IH), 3.27 (t, 2H), 2.86 (t, 2H), 1.96 (m, 2H).
C,5H15N (MW = 209); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 210.
Step C - Synthesis of l -Chloromethylacetyl-8-phenyl-l .2.3.4- tetrahvdroquinoline The product from Step B (1.0 g. 4.78 mmol) was dissolved in CH2CL (20 mL)/ H2O (20 mL) and treated with NaHCO3 (0.602 g, 7.18 mmol) followed by chloroacetyl chloride (0.478 ml, 5.26 mmol). After stirring for 17 h at 23°C, the reaction was diluted with CH2CL, washed with saturated NaHCO3, dried over
Na2SO and purified by SiO2 chromatography (CHC13/Hexanes 9:1). The product was isolated as a colorless solid.
Physical data were as follows:
C,7Hl6ClNO (MW = 286.77); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 287.
Anal. Calcd for CI7H16ClNO; C, 71.45 H, 5.64 N, 4.90. Found: C, 71.63 H, 5.60 N, 4.87. Step D - Synthesis of 5.6-Dihydro-4H-quino[8.1-ab][3]benzazepin-
8(9H)-one The product from Step C (0.89 g, 3.11 mmol) was mixed thoroughly with
AlClj (0.87 g, 6.54 mmol) at 23 °C and the mixture heated neat at 100°C for 5-7 minutes. After vigorous gas evolution, the molten mixture was allowed to cool and extracted with several portions of CH2Cl2/NaHCO3 (sat). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4 and the title compound was purified by chromatography (SiO2, CHCl3/hexanes 9:1), yielding a colorless oil which solidified upon standing.
Physical data were as follows:
C,7H15NO (MW = 249.312); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 250.
Anal. Calcd for C17H15NO; C, 81.90 H, 6.06 N, 5.62. Found: C. 81.75 H, 6.11 N, 5.86.
Step E - Synthesis of 9-Oximo-5.6-Dihydro-4H-quino[8.1 - ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one The product from Step D (0.490 g, 1.97 mmol) was dissolved in THF and butyl nitrite (0.46 mL, 3.93 mmol) and treated with KHMDS (0.5 M. 4.52 mL,
2.26 mmol) at 0°C. After stirring for 1 h, the reaction was quenched with cold 1 N
HCl, extracted with EtOAc. the combined organic layers dried over Na2SO and the product purified by SiO2 chromatography (CHCl3/MeOH, 99:1). The title compound was isolated as a colorless solid.
Physical data were as follows:
Cl7H14N2O2 (MW = 278.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 279.
Anal. Calcd for C17HI N2O2.0.3317 mol H2O; C, 71.82 H, 5.19 N, 9.85. Found: C, 71.85 H, 5.09 N, 9.59.
Step F - Synthesis of 9-Amino-5.6-Dihydro-4H-quino[8.1- ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one The product from Step E (0.360 g, 1.29 mmol) was hydrogenated over
Ra/Ni (0.05 g) in EtOH (50 mL)/ NH3 (anhydrous) (5.0 mL) at 100°C and 500 psi for 10 h. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the resulting filtrate chromatographed over SiO2 (CHCl3/MeOH, 98:2) yielding the titled compound as a colorless oil which solidified upon standing.
Physical data were as follows:
C,7Hι6N2O (MW = 264.326); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 266.
Anal. Calcd for C,7H,6N2O; C, 77.25 H, 6.10 N, 10.60. Found: C, 77.23 H, 6.15 N, 10.49.
Example 7-AC
Synthesis of
9-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-5,6-dihydro-
4H-quino[8,l-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one Hydrochloride
Step A - Synthesis of 9-(N'-Boc-L-Alaninyl)amino-5.6-Dihvdro-4H- quino[8.1-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one Following General Procedure D and using N-Boc -Alanine (Aldrich) and 9-amino-5,6-dihydro-4H-quino[8, l-ab][3]benzazepin-8(9H)-one (from
Example 7-AC), the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
C25H29N3O4 (MW = 435.521); mass spectroscopy (MH+ ) 436.
Anal. Calcd for C25H29N3O4 .0.4102 mol H2O; C, 67.79 H, 6.79 N, 9.49;
Found: C, 67.83 H, 6.91 N, 9.29.
Step B - Synthesis of 9-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-5.6-dihydro-4H- quinof8. l-ab][31benzazepin-8(9H)-one Hydrochloride Following General Procedure E and using the product from Step A, the title compound was prepared.
Physical data were as follows:
C20H21N3O2 HCl (MW = 371.6); mass spectroscopy (MH+ free base ) 335. C. Benzodiazepine Derivatives and Related Compounds
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-A N- 1 -Methy lation of Benzodiazepines A solution of benzodiazepine (1 eq.) in DMF (0.1 M concentration) at 0°C was treated with potassium tert-butoxide (1.0 eq., 1.0 M solution in THF). After stirring for 30 minutes at 0°C, iodomethane (1.3 eq.) was added and stirring continued for 25 minutes. The mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with water and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated. The crude product was then either purified by trituration with 1 : 1 ether/hexanes or chromatographed via HPLC using ethyl acetate/hexanes as the eluent.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-B Cbz Removal Procedure A flask was charged with the Cbz-protected 3-aminobenzodiazepine (1 eq.). To this was added HBr (34 eq.; 30% solution in acetic acid). Within 20 minutes all ofthe starting material dissolves. The reaction was stirred for 5 hours at ambient temperature. Ether was added to the orange solution causing the HBr»amine salt to precipitate. The mixture was decanted. This process of adding ether and decanting was repeated thrice in an effort to remove acetic acid and benzyl bromide. Toluene was added and the mixture concentrated in vacuo. This step was also repeated. The HBr salt was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 M K2CO3. The aqueous layer was back-extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-C Boc Removal Procedure A solution of Boc-protected amine (1 eq.) in methylene chloride (0.15 M concentration) was cooled to 0°C and treated with trifluoroacetic acid (30 eq.). After 10 minutes at 0°C, the cooling bath was removed and stirring continued at ambient for 20 minutes to 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove excess trifluoroacetic acid. The residue was dissolved in methylene chloride and washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 or 1 M K2CO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO , filtered, and concentrated.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-D Azide Transfer Reaction Using KHMDS The azido derivative was prepared using the procedure described in John W. Butcher et al., Tet. Lett..37, 6685-6688 (1996).
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-E Azide Transfer Reaction Using LDA To a solution of diisopropylamine (1.1 eq.) in 1 mL of dry THF cooled to - 78 °C was added n-butyl lithium (1.6M in hexane) (1.1 eq.) dropwise maintaing the reaction temperature at -78 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min. at - 78 °C and then the lactam (0.471 mM) was added dropwise as a solution in 1 mL of dry THF. The reaction mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 30 min. and then a pre- cooled solution of trisyl azide (1.2 eq.) was added as a solution in 1 mL of dry THF. The reaction mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 20 min. and then quenched with acetic acid (4.0 eq.). The reaction mixture was then stirred at 40 °C for 2 hrs. The reaction was then poured into EtOAc and washed with water, sodium bicarbonate and brine, and then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by LC 2000 chromatography.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-F Azido Group Reduction The azido group was reduced to the corresponding primary amine using the procedure described in John W. Butcher et al., Tet. Lett., 37, 6685-6688 (1996). GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-G
N- Alkylation of Amides or Lactams Using Sodium Hydride or Potassium tert-Butoxide
To a slurry of sodium hydride or potassium tert-butoxide (1.1 eq) in 15 mL of dry DMF was added the appropriate amide (0.0042 moles) as a solution in 10 mL of DMF. The alkyl iodide was then added and a thick slurry resulted. The reaction became less thick as time elapsed and when complete by TLC the reaction had become homogeneous. The reaction mixture was poured over ice and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, followed by brine. The organic layer was then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by HPLC (LC
2000), eluting with an ethyl acetate/hexane system.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-H
N-Alkylation of Amides or Lactams Using KHMDS
To the appropriate amide or lactam in THF cooled to -78 °C was added
KHMDS dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min. at -78 °C. The alkyl iodide was then added dropwise while maintaining the temperature at -70 °C.
The cooling bath was then removed and reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirring was continued for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was then poured over ice and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic extracts were washed with water, followed by brine. The organic layer was then dried over sodium sulfate. filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by HPLC (LC 2000), eluting with an ethyl acetate/hexane system.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-1
N-Alkylation of Amides or Lactams Using Cesium Carbonate
To a solution ofthe amide or lactam in DMF was added cesium carbonate
(1.05 eq) and an alkyl iodide (1.1 eq). The mixture was allowed to stir overnight at room temperature and then the reaction mixture was dilluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water, followed by brine. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by HPLC (LC 2000), eluting with an ethyl acetate/hexane system.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-J BOC Removal Procedure To an N-Boc protected compound was added CH2CL/TFA (4:1) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours and then concentrated. The residue was extracted into dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated sodium bicarbonate, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to give the free amine.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-K Azide Transfer Procedure This azide transfer procedure is a modification of the procedure described in Evans, D. A.; Britton, T. C; Ellman, J. A.; Dorow, R. L. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1990, 112, 4011-4030. To a solution ofthe lactam substrate (1.0 eq.) in THF (-0.1 M) under N2 at -78 °C was added a solution of KN(TMS)2 (1.1 eq. of 0.5 M in Toluene. Aldrich) dropwise over a period of 2-10 minutes. A slight exotherm was often observed by an internal thermometer, and the resulting solution was stirred for 5-15 minutes, while re-cooling to -78 °C. Then, trisyl azide (1.1-1.5 eq., CAS No. 36982-84-0, prepared as described by references in the Evans reference above) in THF (~0.5 M), either precooled to -78 °C or at room temperature, was added via cannula over a period of 0.5-5 minutes. Again, a slight exotherm was generally noted. The resulting solution was stirred for from 5-10 minutes, while re-cooling to -78 °C. Then, AcOH (4.5-4.6 eq., glacial) was added, the cooling bath removed and the mixture allowed to warm to room temperature with stirring for 12-16 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, in a 2-5 volume multiple ofthe initial THF volume, and washed with dilute aq. NaHCO3 (l-2x), 0.1-1.0 M aq. HCl (0- 2x), and brine (lx). The organic phase was then dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated to provide the crude product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-L Azide Reduction to an Amine A mixture ofthe azide in absolute EtOH (0.03-0.07 M) and 10% Pd/C (-1/3 by weight ofthe azide) was shaken in a Parr apparatus under H2 (35-45 psi) at room temperature for 3-6 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtration through a plug of Celite, rinsing with absolute EtOH, and the filtrate concentrated to provide the crude amine product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-M Amide Alkylation Using Cesium Carbonate This procedure is a modification ofthe procedure described in Claremon, D. A.; et al, PCT Application: WO 96-US8400 960603. To a mixture of 2,4- dioxo-2,3,4.5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine (CAS No. 49799-48-6) in DMF (1.0 eq., 0.7 M) under N2 at room temperature was added Cs2CO3 (2.2 eq.) and the appropriate alkyl halide (2.2 eq.). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5.5-16 hours. The mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and sat. NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc ( 1 -2x) and the combined EtOAc extracts were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to provide the crude product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE 8-N BOC Removal Procedure A stream of anhydrous HCl gas was passed through a stirred solution ofthe N-t-Boc protected amino acid in 1,4-dioxane (0.03-0.09 M), chilled in a ice bath to ~10°C under N2, for 10-15 minutes. The solution was capped, the cooling bath removed, and the solution was allowed to warm to room temperature with stirring for 2-8 hours, monitoring by TLC for the consumption of starting material. The solution was concentrated (and in some instances dissolved in CH2CL then re- concentrated and placed in vacuum oven at 60-70 °C to remove most ofthe residual dioxane) and used without further purification.
Example 8-A
Synthesis of 3-Amino-l,3-dihydro-5-(l-piperidinyl)-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 1.2-Dihydro-3H-l-methyl-5-(l -piperidinyD-
1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of phosphorous pentachloride (1.2 eq) in methylene chloride was added dropwise to a solution of 1 -methyl- 1,2, 3,4-tetrahydro-3H- 1,4- benzodiazepin-2,5-dione (Showell, G. A.; Bourrain, S.; Neduvelil, J. G.; Fletcher, S. R.; Baker, R.; Watt, A. P.; Fletcher, A. E.; Freedman, S. B.; Kemp, J. A.; Marshall, G. R.; Patel, S.; Smith, A. J.; Matassa, V. G. J. Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 719.) in methylene chloride. The resultant yellowish-orange solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 2.5 hours; the solvent was removed in vacuo. The orange residue was redissolved in methylene chloride, cooled to 0 °C, and treated with a solution of piperidine (2 eq) and triethylamine (2 eq) in methylene chloride. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction stirred for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (back-extracted with methylene chloride) and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2S0 , filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via HPLC eluting with a gradient of 4 to 10% methanol/methylene chloride affording the title intermediate as a yellow solid having a melting point of 103-105 °C.
C,5H19N3O (MW 257.37); mass spectroscopy 257.
Anal. Calcd for C15Hl9N3O: C. 70.01 ; H, 7.44; N, 16.33. Found: C, 69.94; H, 7.58; N, 16.23.
Step B - Preparation of 1.2-Dihydro-3H-l-methyl-3-oximido-5-(l- piperidinyl)- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Potassium tert-butoxide (2.5 eq) was added in two portions to a -20 °C solution of l,2-dihydro-3H- l-methyl-5-(l -piperidinyl)- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1 eq) in toluene. After stirring at - 20°C for 20 min, isoamyl nitrite (1.2 eq.; Aldrich) was added to the red reaction mixture. The reaction was stirred at -20 °C for 5 hours at which time the reaction was done by TLC. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction quenched with 0.5 M citric acid. After stirring for 10 minutes, diethyl ether was added. The suspension was stirred at ambient temperature overnight then filtered washing with ether. The resultant cream colored solid had a melting point of 197-200 °C.
'H NMR data of the E/Z isomers was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 7.64 (IH, bs). 7.48 (2H, d, J=7.4 Hz), 7.35-7.20 (6H, m), 6.75 (IH, bs), 3.8-3.2 (8H, m), 3.46 (3H, s), 3.42 (3H, s), 1.90- 1.40 (12H, m).
C,5H18N4O2 (MW = 286.37); mass spectroscopy 286.
Step C - Preparation of 1.2-dihvdro-3H-l-methyl-3-[O-
(ethylaminocarbonyl)oximido]-5-(l -piperidinyl)- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
A mixture of l,2-dihydro-3H-l-methyl-3-oximido-5-(l -piperidinyl)- 1,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (1 eq) in THF was treated with ethyl isocyanate (1.7 eq) and triethylamine (0.6 eq). The mixture was heated to 64°C for 4 hours. The mixture was concentrated and the residue purified by HPLC eluting with 5%> methanol/methylene chloride.
'H NMR data ofthe E/Z isomers was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 7.50 (2H, dd, J=8.4, 1.5 Hz), 7.35-7.22 (6H, m), 6.42 (IH, bt), 6.20 (IH, bt), 3.7-3.4 (8H, m), 3.46 (3H, s), 3.44 (3H, s), 3.25 (4H, m), 1.9-1.4 (12H, m), 1.12 (3H, t, J=6.3 Hz), 1.10 (3H, t, J=6.3 Hz).
C,8H23N5O3 (MW = 357.46); mass spectroscopy 357.
Step D - Preparation of 3-Amino-l .3-dihvdro-2H-l-methyl-5-(l- piperidinyl)- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The l,2-dihydro-3H-l-methyl-3-[O-(ethylaminocarbonyl)oximido]-5-(l- piperidinyl)-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1 eq) was hydrogenated in methanol over 5% palladium on carbon (0.15 eq) at 43 psi for 3.25 hours. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was taken up in methylene chloride and filtered a second time through celite. The filtrate was concentrated and the resultant foam was used immediately.
Example 8-B
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro- l-methyI-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of (S)-3-amino-1.3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-
2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one. ( 1 S)-7.7-dimethyl-2- oxobicvclo[2.2.1]heptane-l-methanesulfonate
The title intermediate was prepared according to Reider, P. J.; Davis, P.;
Hughes, D. L.; Grabowski, E. J. J. J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 955 using 3-amino-l,3- dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (Bock M. G.; DiPardo, R.
M.; Evans, B. E.; Rittle, K. E.; Veber, D. F.; Freidinger, R. M.; Hirshfield, J.;
Springer, J. P. J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 3232.) as the starting material.
Step B - Preparation of 3-[N,-(tert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
(S)-3-Amino- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, (lS)-7,7-dimethyl-2-oxobicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-l-methanesulfonate was free based by partitioning between methylene chloride and IM potassium carbonate. The free amine was then coupled with N-Boc-alanine following General Procedure D.
C24H28N4O4 (MW = 436.56); mass spectroscopy 436.
Anal. Calc. for C24H28N4O4: C, 66.03; H, 6.47; N, 12.84. Found: C, 65.79; H, 6.68; N, 12.80. Step C - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title compound was prepared as a white foam.
Anal. Calc. for C19H,9N4O2: C, 69.21; H, 6.64; N, 15.37. Found: C, 70.11; H, 6.85; N, 15.01.
Example 8-C
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-chloro-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7-chloro-2.3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7-chloro-2,3-dihydro-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-Benzodiazepin-2-one (1 eq; Neosystem) in DMF was cooled to 0°C and treated with potassium tert-butoxide (1 eq; 1.0M solution in THF). The resultant yellow solution was stirred at 0°C for 30 minutes then quenched with methyl iodide (1.3 eq). After stirring an addition 25 minutes the reaction was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with water and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO , filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via HPLC chromatography eluting with a gradient of 20-30% ethyl acetate/hexanes.
C24H20C1N3O3 (MW = 433.92); mass spectroscopy 433.
Anal, calcd for C24H20C1N3O3: C, 66.44; H, 4.65; N, 9.68. Found: C, 66.16; H, 4.50; N, 9.46.
Step B - Preparation of 3-Amino-7-chloro- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5- phenyl-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7- chloro-2.3-dihydro-l -methy 1-5 -phenyl- 1H-1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam which was used immediately in Step C. Step C - Preparation of 3-[N'-tert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-7-chloro- 1.3-dihydro-l -methyl-5-phenyl-2H-l .4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-7- chloro- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C24H28ClN4O4 (MW = 471.18); mass spectroscopy 471
Anal, calcd for C24H28ClN4O4: C, 61.21; H, 5.78; N, 11.90. Found: C,
61.24; H, 5.59; N, 11.67.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-7-chloro-L3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-phenyl-2H-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-7-chloro-l, 3-dihydro-l -mefhyl-5-phenyl-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2- one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-D
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-7-bromo-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7-bromo-2,3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-A using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7- bromo-2,3-dihydro-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (Neosystem), the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C24H19BrFN3O3 (MW = 496.36); mass spectroscopy 497.
Anal, calcd for C24H,9BrFN3O3: C, 58.08; H, 3.86; N, 8.47. Found: C, 57.90; H, 4.15; N, 8.20. Step B - Preparation of 3-Amino-7-bromo- 1.3-dihydro-l -methyl-5-
(2-fluoropheny D-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7- bromo-2,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam which was used immediately in
Step C.
Step C - Preparation of 3-[N '-(tert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-7-bromo-l .3-dihydro-l -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)- 2H-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine (Novo) and 3- amino- 7-bromo- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin- 2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C24H26BrFN4O4 (MW = 533.12); mass spectroscopy 533.2.
Anal, calcd for C24H26BrFN4O4: C, 54.04; H, 4.91 ; N, 10.50. Found: C, 53.75; H, 4.92; N, 10.41.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-bromo-l .3-dihydro-
1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-7-bromo-l, 3-dihydro-l -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H-l.4- benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-E
Synthesis of
3-(N'-Methyl-L-alaninyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-[N A^grt-Butylcarbamate)-N'-methyl-L- alaninyl]-amino-2.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one Following General Procedure D and using (S)-3-amino-l,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-phenyl-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (Example 8-B) and N-tert-Boc-N- methyl-alanine (Sigma), the title intermediate was obtained as a white solid.
C25H30N4O4 (MW = 450.2); mass spectroscopy (M+l) 451.2.
Anal, calcd for C25H30N4O4: C, 66.65; H, 6.71; N, 12.44. Found: C, 66.66; H, 6.89; N, 12.21.
Step A - Preparation of 3-(N,-Methyl-L-alaninyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-
1 -methyl-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C and using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)- N ' -methyl-L-alaninyl] -amino-2.3 -dihydro- 1 -methy 1-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C20H22N4O2 (MW =350.46); mass spectroscopy (M+l) 351.4.
Anal, calcd for C20H22N4O2: C, 68.55; H, 6.33; N, 15.99. Found, C, 68.36; H, 6.20; N, 15.79.
Example 8-F
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-7-chloro-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7-chloro-2.3- dihvdro- 1 -methyl-5 -(2-chloropheny D- 1 H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8- A using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7- chloro-2,3-dihydro-5-(2-chlorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (Neosystem), the title intermediate was prepared as a white solid having a melting point of 232- 233 °C.
C24H,9Cl2N3O3 (MW = 468.36); mass spectroscopy 468.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 7.67 (IH, m), 7.52 (IH, dd, J=2.4, 8.7 Hz), 7.42-7.26 (9H, m), 7.07 (IH, d, J=2.4 Hz), 6.70 (IH, d, J=8.3 Hz), 5.35 (IH, d, J=8.4 Hz), 5.14 (2H, ABq, J=19.6 Hz), 3.47 (3H, s). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 166.66, 165.65, 155.72, 140.52, 136.99, 136.0, 132.87, 131.99, 131.47, 131.40, 131.38, 131.16, 130.54, 130.06, 128.45, 128.08, 128.03, 127.72, 127.22, 123.28, 122.01, 68.95, 67.02, 35.32.
Step B - Preparation of 3-Amino-7-chloro- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -mefhyl-5-
(2-chlorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7- chloro-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam which was used immediately in
Step C.
Step C - Preparation of 3-[N,-(tgrt-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-7-chloro-1.3-dihvdro-l-methyl-5-(2-chlorophenyl)- 2H-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-7- chloro- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-chloropheny 1)-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C24H26CLN4O4 (MW = 505.44); mass spectroscopy 505.2.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-chloro-1.3-dihydro-
1 -methyl-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-2H-l .4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-7-chloro- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-G
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-5-cyclohexyl-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-lH-l,4-Benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-5-cylclohexyl-
2.3-dihvdro- 1 -methyl- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one Following General Procedure 8-A using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-5- cyclohexyl-2,3-dihydro-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (Neosystem), the title intermediate was prepared as a white solid having a melting point of 205-206°C.
C24H27N3O3 (MW = 405.54); mass spectroscopy 405.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 7.54 (IH, d, J=7.9 Hz), 7.48 (IH, d, J=7.7 Hz), 7.36-7.26 (7H, m), 6.54 (IH, d, J= 8.3 Hz), 5.15 (IH, d, J=8.0 Hz), 5.09 (2H, ABq, J=17.1 Hz), 3.39 (3H, s), 2.77 (IH, m), 2.01 (IH, bd, J=13.6 Hz), 1.85 (IH, bd, J=12.4 Hz), 1.68-1.49 (4H, m), 1.34-1.02 (4H, m).
Step B - Preparation of 3-Amino-5-cyclohexyl- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-
2H-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-5- cyclohexyl-2,3-dihydro-l -methyl- lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam which was used immediately in Step C.
C16H2,N3O (MW+H = 272.1763); mass spectroscopy 272.1766
Step C - Preparation of 3-[N,-(tgrt-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-5-cvclohexy 1- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-2H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-5- cyclohexyl- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam.
C24H34N4O4 (MW = 442.62); mass spectroscopy (M+H) 443.2.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-5-cyclohexyl-l ,3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-5-cyclohexyl- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam. The crude material was used immediately.
C19H26N4O2 (M+H = 343.2136); mass spectroscopy found 343.2139. Example 8-H
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
7-nitro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 2-[N- -Isopropylthio)-N,-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-5-nitrobenzophenone
A solution of α-(isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)glycine (1 eq; prepared according to Zoller, V.; Ben-Ishai, D. Tetrahedron 1975, 31, 863.) in dry THF was cooled to 0 °C and treated with oxalyl chloride (1 eq.) and 3 drops of DMF. After stirring for 15 minutes at 0°C, the cooling bath was removed and stirring continued at ambient temperature for 40 minutes. The solution was recooled to 0°C. A solution of 2-amino-5-nitrobenzophenone (0.9 eq.; Acros) and 4-methylmoφholine (2.0 eq.) in dry THF was added via cannulation to the acid chloride. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction stirred at ambient for 5 hours. The reaction was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with 0.5 M citric acid, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via preparative LC2000 eluting with a gradient of 15-20% ethyl acetate/hexanes giving an off- white foam.
C26H25N3O6S (MW = 507.61); mass spectroscopy found 507.9.
Anal, calcd for C26H25N3O6S: C, 61.53; H, 4.96; N, 8.28. Found: C, 61.70; H, 4.99; N, 8.22.
Step B - Preparation of 2-[N-( -Amino)-N,-(benzyloxycarbonyl)- glvcinyl]-amino-5-nitrobenzophenone
Ammonia gas was bubbled into a solution 2-[N-( -isopropylthio)-N'-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-5-nitrobenzophenone (1 eq) in THF at 0°C.
After 35 minutes mercury (II) chloride (1.1 eq) was added. The ice bath was removed and ammonia gas was continued to bubble through the suspension for 4 hours. The bubbler was removed and the reaction continued to stir for 16 hours.
The mixture was filtered through celite washing with THF. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude solid was used in step C without further purification.
Step C - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-7- nitro-5-phenyl-lH-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
2-[N-( -Amino)-N'-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-5- nitrobenzophenone (1 eq) was treated with glacial acetic acid and ammonium acetate (4.7 eq). The suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 21 hours. After concentrating the reaction in vacuo, the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 N NaOH. The aqueous layer was back-extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of 2-3% isopropyl alcohol/methylene chloride.
C23H18N4O5 (MW = 430.45); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 431.2.
Anal, calcd for C23H18N4O5: C, 64.18; H, 4.22; N, 13.02. Found: C, 64.39; H, 4.30; N, 13.07.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l - methyl-7-nitro-5-pheny 1- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-A and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino- 2,3-dihydro-7-nitro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam.
C24H20N4O5 (MW = 444.48); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 445.2.
Anal, calcd for C24H20N4O5: C, 64.86; H, 4.54; N, 12.60. Found: C, 65.07; H, 4.55; N, 12.46.
Step E - Preparation of 3-Amino- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-7-nitro-5- phenyl-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-
2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-7-nitro-5-phenyl-lH-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam which was used immediately in Step F.
Step F - Preparation of 3-[N'-(tert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-7-nitro-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-l,3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-7-nitro-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow solid.
C24H27N5O6 (MW = 481.56); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 482.3.
Anal, calcd for C24H27N5O6: C, 59.88; H, 5.61 ; N, 14.55. Found: C, 60.22; H, 5.75; N, 13.91.
Step G - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2.3-dihvdro-l-methyl-
7-nitro-5-phenyl-lH-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaniny l]-amino-2,3-dihydro- 1 -methy l-7-nitro-5-phenyl- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2- one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-1
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyf)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-(2-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 3-Amino- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2- fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A flask was charged with 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-7-bromo-2,3- dihydro-1 -methy l-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1 eq.; Example
8-D, Step A) and 10% palladium on carbon. Methanol was added, and the flask was placed under a balloon of H2. The reaction was stirred for 21 hours. The mixture was filtered through celite washing with methanol. The filtrate was concentrated to a white solid. C16H14FN3O (MW = 283.33); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 284.1.
Step B - Preparation of 3-[N,-(tert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino- 1.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-l,3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white solid.
C24H27FN4O4 (MW = 454.50); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 455.4.
Anal, calcd for C24H27FN4O4: C, 63.44; H, 5.95; N, 12.33. Found: C, 63.64; H, 6.08; N, 12.16.
Step C - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-7-bromo-l ,3-dihvdro-
1 -methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-l,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-
2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a white foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-J
Synthesis of
3-(L-AlaninyI)-amino-2,3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 2-Amino-3 '-fluorobenzophenone
A solution of 3-bromofluorobenzene (1 eq.) in THF was cooled to -78 °C under nitrogen and treated with tert-butyllithium (2.05 eq., 1.6 M solution in pentane) at a rate of 40 ml/h. The internal temperature did not rise above -74°C.
The orange solution was stiπed at -78° C for 30 minutes prior to the addition of anthranilonitrile (0.6 eq.) as a solution in THF. The reaction was warmed to 0°C and stirred for 2 hours. 3N HCl was added to the mixture and stirring continued for 30 minutes. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was back-extracted thrice with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via HPLC eluting with 93:7 hexanes/ethyl acetate.
CI3H10FNO (MW = 215.24); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 216.3.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ d 7.44-7.19 (6H, m), 6.74 (IH, d, J=8.0 Hz), 6.61 (IH, dd, J=0.94, 7.9 Hz), 6.10 (2H, bs).
Step B - Preparation of 2-[N-(«-Isopropylfhio)-N'-
(benzyloxycarbonyD-glycinylj'-aminoA- fluorobenzophenone
A solution of -(isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)glycine (1 eq; prepared according to Zoller, V.; Ben-Ishai, D. Tetrahedron 1975, 31, 863.) in dry THF was cooled to 0°C and treated with oxalyl chloride (1 eq.) and 3 drops of DMF. After stirring for 15 minutes at 0°C, the cooling bath was removed and stirring continued at ambient temperature for 40 minutes. The solution was recooled to 0°C. A solution of 2-amino-3' -fluorobenzophenone (0.9 eq.) and 4- methylmoφholine (2.0 eq.) in dry THF was added via cannulation to the acid chloride. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction stireed at ambient for 5 hours. The reaction was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with 0.5 M citric acid, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via preparative LC2000 eluting with a gradient of 15-20% ethyl acetate/hexanes giving an off- white foam.
C26H25N2O4S (MW = 480.60); mass spectroscopy found (M+NH4J 498.3.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ d 1 1.39 (IH, s), 8.59 (IH, d, J=6.0 Hz), 7.63- 7.55 (2H. m), 7.48-7.27 (9H, m), 7.14 (IH, dt, J=1.2, 8.4 Hz), 5.94 (IH, d, J=7.2 Hz), 5.58 (IH, d, J=8.7 Hz), 5.17 (2H, ABq, J=14.7 Hz), 3.25 (IH, sep, J=6.6 Hz), 1.44 (3H, d, J=6.0 Hz), 1.28 (3H, d, J=6.6 Hz). Step C - Preparation of 2-[N-( -Amino)-N,-(benzyloxycarbonyl)- glyciny 1] -amino-3 ' -fluorobenzophenone
Ammonia gas was bubbled into a solution 2-[N-(α-isopropylthio)-N'-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-3 '-fluorobenzophenone (1 eq) in THF at
0°C. After 35 minutes mercury(II) chloride (1.1 eq) was added. The ice bath was removed and ammonia gas was continued to bubble through the suspension for 4 hours. The bubbler was removed and the reaction continued to stir for 16 hours.
The mixture was filtered through celite washing with THF. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude solid was used in step D without further purification.
Step D - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-5-
(3 -fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
2-[N-( -Amino)-N'-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-3'- fluorobenzophenone (1 eq) was treated with glacial acetic acid and ammonium acetate (4.7 eq). The suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 21 hours. After concentrating the reaction in vacuo, the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 N NaOH. The aqueous layer was back-extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of 2-3%) isopropyl alcohol/methylene chloride.
C23H18FN3O3 (MW = 403.44); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 404.4.
Anal, calcd for C23H18FN3O3»0.5H2O: C, 66.98; H, 4.64; N, 10.18. Found: C, 67.20; H, 4.64; N, 9.77.
Step E - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-A and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino- 2,3-dihydro-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam.
C24H20FN3O3 (MW = 417.47); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 418.3. Anal, calcd for C24H20FN3O3: C, 69.06; H, 4.83; N, 10.07. Found: C, 69.33; H, 4.95; N, 9.82.
Step F - Preparation of 3-Amino-1.3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(3- fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-
2, 3-dihydro-l -methy l-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam which was used immediately in Step
G.
Step G - Preparation of 3-[N,-(/ert-Butylcarbamate)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2.3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-l,3- dihydro-l-methyl-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow solid.
C24H27FN4O (MW = 454.50); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 455.3.
Anal, calcd for C24H27FN4O4: C, 63.42; H. 5.99; N, 12.33. Found: C, 63.34: H, 6.01 ; N, 12.08.
Step H - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-(3-fluorophenyl -lH-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tert-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(3-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-
2-one. the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam. The crude material was used immediately. Example 8-K
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Preparation of 2-Amino-4' -fluorobenzophenone
A solution of 4-bromofluorobenzene (1 eq.) in THF was cooled to -78°C under nitrogen and treated with tert-butyllifhium (2.05 eq., 1.6 M solution in pentane) at a rate of 40 ml/h. The internal temperature did not rise above -74 °C. The orange solution was stirred at -78 °C for 30 minutes prior to the addition of anthranilonitrile (0.6 eq.) as a solution in THF. The reaction was warmed to 0°C and stirred for 2 hours. 3N HCl was added to the mixture and stirring continued for 30 minutes. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was back-extracted thrice with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via HPLC eluting with 93:7 hexanes/ethyl acetate.
C,3H,0FNO (MW = 215.24); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 216.3.
Anal, calcd for CI 3HIOFNO: C, 72.55; H, 4.68; N, 6.51. Found: C, 72.80; H, 4.51 ; N, 6.74.
Step B - Preparation of 2-[N-( -Isopropylthio -N,-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-4'- fluorobenzophenone
A solution of -(isopropylthio)-N-(benzyloxycarbonyl)glycine (1 eq; prepared according to Zoller, V.; Ben-Ishai, D. Tetrahedron 1975, 31, 863.) in dry
THF was cooled to 0°C and treated with oxalyl chloride (1 eq.) and 3 drops of
DMF. After stiπing for 15 minutes at 0°C, the cooling bath was removed and stirring continued at ambient temperature for 40 minutes. The solution was recooled to 0°C. A solution of 2-amino-4'-fluorobenzophenone (0.9 eq.) and 4- methylmoφholine (2.0 eq.) in dry THF was added via cannulation to the acid chloride. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction stirred at ambient for 5 hours. The reaction was diluted with methylene chloride and washed with 0.5 M citric acid, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via preparative LC2000 eluting with a gradient of 15-20%) ethyl acetate/hexanes giving an off- white foam.
C26H25N2O4S (MW = 480.60); mass spectroscopy found (M+NH4 +) 498.2.
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J d 11.28 (IH, s), 8.56 (IH, d, J=8.4 Hz), 7.78- 7.73 (2H, m), 7.61-7.53 (2H, m), 7.36-7.32 (5H, m). 7.20-7.14 (3H, m), 5.98 (IH, d, J=7.5 Hz), 5.57 (IH, d, J=7.8 Hz), 5.16 (2H, ABq, J=14.7 Hz), 3.25 (IH, sep, J=6.0 Hz), 1.43 (3H, d, J=6.3 Hz), 1.27 (3H, d, J=6.6 Hz).
Step C - Preparation of 2-[N-(α-Amino)-N'-(benzyloxycarbonyl)- glycinyl]-amino-4' -fluorobenzophenone
Ammonia gas was bubbled into a solution 2-[N-(α-isopropylthio)-N'-
(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-3' -fluorobenzophenone (1 eq) in THF at
0°C. After 35 minutes mercury(II) chloride (1.1 eq) was added. The ice bath was removed and ammonia gas was continued to bubble through the suspension for 4 hours. The bubbler was removed and the reaction continued to stir for 16 hours.
The mixture was filtered through celite washing with THF. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude solid was used in step D without further purification.
Step D - Preparation of* 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)amino-2.3-dihydro-5-
(4-fluoropheny D- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
2-[N-(α-Amino)-N'-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-glycinyl]-amino-4'- fluorobenzophenone ( 1 eq) was treated with glacial acetic acid and ammonium acetate (4.7 eq). The suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 21 hours.
After concentrating the reaction in vacuo, the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 N NaOH. The aqueous layer was back-extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified via flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of 2-3% isopropyl alcohol/methylene chloride. C23H18FN3O3 (MW = 403.44); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 404.4. Anal, calcd for C23H18FN3O3»1.25H2O: C, 64.85; H, 4.85. Found: C, 64.80; H, 4.55.
Step E - Preparation of 3-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-A and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino- 2,3-dihydro-5-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam.
C24H20FN3O3 (MW = 417.47); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 418.2.
Anal, calcd for C24H20FN3O3: C, 69.06; H, 4.83; N, 10.07. Found: C, 69.35; H, 4.93; N, 9.97.
Step F - Preparation of 3-Amino-l .3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-(4- fluorophenyl)-2H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-B and using 3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-amino-
2,3-dihydro- 1 -methy l-5-(4-fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam which was used immediately in Step
G.
Step G - Preparation of 3-[N Agrt-ButylcarbamateVL-alaninyl]- amino-2.3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(4-fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1.4- benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure D using N-Boc-L-alanine and 3-amino-l,3- dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(4-fluorophenyl)-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow solid.
C24H27FN4O4 (MW = 454.50); mass spectroscopy found (M+H) 455.4.
Anal, calcd for C24H27FN4O4'1.5H2O: C, 59.86; H, 6.28; N, 11.64. Found: C, 60.04; H, 5.62; N, 11.27. Step H - Preparation of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2.3-dihydro-l -methyl-
5-(4-fluorophenyD- 1 H- 1.4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C using 3-[N'-(tgrt-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-(4-fluorophenyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-
2-one, the title intermediate was prepared as a yellow foam. The crude material was used immediately.
Example 8-L
Synthesis of
3-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-isobutyl-
5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: l,3-Dihydro-5-phenyl-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (prepared according to the procedure of M. G. Bock et al., J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 3232-
3239) was alkylated with isobutyl iodide using General Procedure 8-G to afford
1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -isobutyl-5-phenyl-2H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one.
Step B: Following General Procedures 8-D and 8-F and using the product from Step A, 3-amino-l, 3-dihydro- l-isobutyl-5-phenyl-2H-l,4-benzodiazepin-2- one was prepared.
Step C: The product from Step B and N-Boc-L-alanine (Sigma) were coupled using General Procedure D, followed by removal ofthe Boc group using General Procedure 8-J, to afford 3-(N'-L-alaninyl)amino-l,3-dihydro-l-isobutyl-5- pheny 1-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one.
By substituting isopropyl iodide, n-propyl iodide, cyclopropylmethyl iodide and ethyl iodide for isobutyl iodide in Step A above, the following additional intermediates were prepared:
3 -(N ' -L-alaniny l)amino- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -isopropy l-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2 -one 3-(N'-L-alaninyl)amino-l , 3-dihydro-l -propyl-5-phenyl-2H-l ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
3-(N'-L-alaninyl)amino-l, 3-dihydro- l-cyclopropylmethyl-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
3-(N'-L-alaninyl)amino- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -ethyl-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one.
Example 8-M
Synthesis of
3-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-l-methyl-5-phenyl- l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l,5-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: l,3,4,5-Tetrahydro-5-phenyl-2H-l,5-benzodiazepin-2-one (CAS
No. 32900-17-7) was methylated using General Procedure 8-1 to afford 1-mefhyl-
5-phenyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l,5-benzodiazepin-2-one.
Step B: Following General Procedures 8-E and 8-F and using the product from Step A, 3-amino-l-methyl-5-phenyl-l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l,5- benzodiazepin-2-one was prepared.
Step C : The product from Step B and N-Boc-L-alanine (Sigma) were coupled using General Procedure D, followed by removal ofthe Boc group using General Procedure 8-N, to afford 3-(N'-L-alaninyl)amino-l-methyl-5-phenyl- l,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2H-l,5-benzodiazepin-2-one.
Example 8-N
Synthesis of
3-(N'-L-Alaninyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l-methyl-5-phenyl-
2,3»4,5-tetrahy dro- 1 H- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine
3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l-methyl-5-phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine (CAS No. 131604-75-6) was coupled with N-Boc-L-alanine (Sigma) using General Procedure D, followed by removal ofthe Boc group using General Procedure 8-N, to afford the title compound.
Example 8-0
Synthesis of 3-((R)-Hydrazinopropionyl)amino-2,3-dihydro- 1 -methy 1-5-pheny 1)- 1 H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one was coupled to (R)-N,N'-di-BOC-2-hydrazinopropionic acid (Example N) using General Procedure D. Removal of the Boc group using General Procedure 5-B afforded the title compound.
Example 8-P
Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)- 2,3>4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-2,3 4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
2,4-Dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine (CAS No. 49799-48-
6) was prepared from 1 ,2-phenylenediamine (Aldrich) and malonic acid (Aldrich) using the procedure of Claremon, D. A.; et al, PCT Application: WO 96-US8400
960603.
Step B: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
2,4-Dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-( 1 -methy lethyl)-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1H-1,5- benzodiazepine (CAS No. 1 13021-84-4) was prepared following General
Procedure 8-M using the product from Step A and 2-iodopropane (Aldrich).
Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with EtOAc/hexanes (3:7 gradient to 1 :1), then recrystalization from EtOAc/hexanes. Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyι)-
2,3»4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-K using the product from Step B, 3-azido-
2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(l -methylethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5 -benzodiazepine (CAS
No. 186490-50-6) was prepared as a white solid. The product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (4:1) to provide a separable
23:1 mixture of pseudo-axial/pseudo-equatorial azides. The pure pseudo-axial azide was used in the next step.
Step D: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)-
2,3»4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step C, 3-amino-
2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine (CAS
No. 186490-51-7) was prepared as a white solid. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2Cl2/MeOH (98:2 gradient to 95:5). The isolated pseudo-axial amine atropisomer was completely converted to the pseudo-equatorial amine atropisomer by heating in toluene to 100-105 °C for 15 minutes, and the pseudo-equatorial amine atropisomer was used in the next step. The isomers were distinguished by 'H-NMR in CDC13. Selected 'H-NMR (CDCLJ: Pseudo-axial amine 4.40 (s, IH); Pseudo-equatorial amine 3.96 (s. IH).
Example 8-Q
Synthesis of
3-(R-2-Thienylglycinyl)amino-2,4-dioxo- l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of N-(t-ButoxycarbonyI)-R-2-thienylglycine
N-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-R-2-thienylglycine (CAS No. 74462-03-1) was prepared from L- -(2-thienyl)glycine (Sigma) by the procedure described in Bodansky, M. et al; The Practice of Peptide Synthesis; Springer Verlag; 1994, p. 17. Step B: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-R-2- thienylglycinyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(l-methylethyl)- 2,3>4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure J above using the product from Example 8-P and the product from Step A above, 3-[NF-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-R-2- fhienylglycinyl ]-amino-2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-( 1 -methylethyl)-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H-
1 ,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/EtOAc (9:1 gradient to 5:1).
Step C: - Synthesis of 3-(R-2-Thienylglycinyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5- bis-(l-methylethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step B, the title compound was prepared as a white solid.
Example 8-R
Synthesis of
3-(L-AlaninyI)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-
1 H-l ,5-benzodiazepine
2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine (CAS
No. 23954-54-3) was prepared following General Procedure 8-M using the product from Example 8-P, Step A and iodomethane (Aldrich). The white solid product precipitated during partial concentration ofthe reaction after work-up, and was isolated by filtration.
Step B: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
For this substrate, General Procedure 8-K was modified in the following manner. Initially the product from Step A was suspended (not a solution) in THF at -78 °C, and following addition ofthe KN(TMS)2 solution, this suspension was allowed to warm to -35 °C over a period of 12 minutes, during which the suspension became a solution, and was re-cooled to -78 °C; then treated as described in the General Procedure. 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was purified by flash chromatography eluting with CHCl3/EtOAc (7:1), then trituration from hot CHC13 with hexanes and cooled to -23 °C. The product was isolated as a white solid.
Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step B, 3-amino-
2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3.4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. The crude product was used without further purification.
Step D: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(/-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure I above using N-Boc-L-alanine
(Novabiochem) and the product from Step C, 3-[N'-(/-butoxycarbonyl)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l ,5-bis-methyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2Cl2/EtOAc (2:1 gradient to 1 :1).
Step E: - Synthesis of 3-(L-alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis- methyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared as an off-white amoφhous solid. Example 8-S
Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)- 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
2,4-Dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5- benzodiazepine was prepared following General Procedure 8-M using the product from Example 8-P, Step A and l-iodo-2-methylpropane (Aldrich). Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with EtOAc/hexanes (3:7 gradient to 1 :1), then recrystalization from EtOAc/hexanes.
Step B: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyι)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-K (a precipitate formed during the addition ofthe KN(TMS)2, but dissolved upon addition ofthe trisyl azide) using the product from Step A, 3-azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-
1 ,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. The product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (4:1) and a second flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/hexanes/EtOAc (10:10:1 gradient to 8:6:1).
Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyι)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step B, 3-amino-
2,4-dioxo-1.5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with
CH2CL/MeOH (98:2 gradient to 95:5, with 5% NH3 in the MeOH). Step D: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(f-Butoxycarbonyι)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure I above using N-Boc-L-alanine
(Novabiochem) and the product from Step C, 3-[N'-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2Cl2/EtOAc (3:1 gradient to 3:2).
Step E: - Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2- methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared as an amoφhous white solid.
Example 8-T
Synthesis of
3-(S-Pheny Iglyciny I)amino-2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-
(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-S-phenylglycinyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5- tetrahy dro- 1 H- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure J above using the product from Example 8-S,
Step C and the Boc-L-phenylglycine (Novabiochem, CAS No. 2900-27-8), 3-[N'-
(t-butoxycarbonyl)-S-phenylglycinyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam.
Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/EtOAc (9: 1 gradient to 5: 1). Step B: - Synthesis of 3-(S-Phenylglycinyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5- bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step A, 3- (S-phenylglycinyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2-methylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- lH-l,5-benzodiazepine hydrochloride was prepared as an off-white solid.
Example 8-U
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyl)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyι)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
2.4-Dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyl)-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5- benzodiazepine was prepared following General Procedure 8-M using the product from Example 8-P, Step A, and (bromomethyl)cyclopropane (Lancaster). Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with EtOAc/hexanes (3:7 gradient to straight EtOAc), then recrystalization from EtOAc/hexanes.
Step B: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-
(cycIopropylmethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
For this substrate General Procedure 8-K was modified in the following manner. Initially the product from Step A was suspended (not a solution) in THF at -78 °C, and following addition ofthe KN(TMS)2 solution, this suspension was allowed to warm to -30 °C, during which the suspension became a solution, and was re-cooled to -78 °C. Upon re-cooling to -78 °C a precipitate began to form, therefore the reaction flask containing the mixture was partially raised above the cooling bath until the internal temperature rose to -50 °C; then the trisyl azide solution was added. The cooling bath was removed and the mixture allowed to warm to -20 °C whereupon the mixture had become a nearly homogenous solution, and the AcOH was added. Then, treated as described in the general procedure. 3- Azido-2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyl)-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5- benzodiazepine was purified by trituration with hot to room temperature EtOAc, followed by recrystalization from hot to -23 °C CHCl3/EtOAc/EtOH (5:5:1) and isolated as a white solid.
Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-
(cyclopropylmethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step B, 3-amino-
2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyl)-2, 3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/MeOH (98:2 gradient to 95:5, with 5% NH3 in the MeOH) followed by recrystalization from warm CH2CL/hexanes (1:1) to -23 °C.
Step D: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(/-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-aIaninyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(cyclopropyImethyI)-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure I above using N-Boc-L-alanine
(Novabiochem) and the product from Step C, 3-[NA-butoχyc rbonyl)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2.4-dioxo-1.5-bis-(cyclopropylmethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/EtOAc (3:1 gradient to 2:1).
Step E: - Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-
(cyclopropylmethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared as an off-white solid. Example 8-V
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-
2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H-l ,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
To a stirred suspension ofthe product from Example 8-P, Step A (1.0 eq.,
17.08 g) in DMSO (500 mL) at room temperature was added neopentyl iodide
(43.01 g, 2.24 eq., Aldrich) and Cs2CO3 (72.65 g, 2.3 eq., Aldrich). The resulting mixture was heated to 75 °C for 30 minutes, then additional Cs2CO3 (31.59 g, 1.0 eq.) was added and the mixture rapidly stirred at 75 °C for 6 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool and H2O (500 mL) and EtOAc (1000 mL) were added. The phases were partitioned and the organic phase washed with H2O (1x500 mL), 1 M aq. HCl (2x500 mL), and brine (1x500 mL). Then, the organic phase was dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (3:2 gradient to 2:3) to provide 2,4-dioxo- l,5-bis-(2,2- dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine as a white solid.
Step B: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2- dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-K using the product from Step A, 3-azido- 2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. The product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with hexanes/CH2CL/EtOAc (10:5: 1 gradient to 5:5: 1) to provide a separable 13: 1 mixture of pseudo-axial/pseudo-equatorial azides. The pure pseudo-axial azide was used in the next step. Selected 'H-NMR (CDC1J: Pseudo- axial azide 5.12 (s, IH); Pseudo-equatorial azide 4.03 (s, IH). Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2- dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step B, 3-amino- 2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/MeOH (98:2 gradient to 95:5, with 5% NH3 in the MeOH). The isolated white solid product was identified as a -4: 1 mixture of pseudo-axial and pseudo-equatorial amines atropisomers by 'H-NMR. The mixture was heated in toluene to 100 °C for 20 minutes, then re-concentrated to provide the pure pseudo- equatorial amine atropisomer, as a white solid, and this was for the next step. Selected 'H-NMR (CDCLJ: Pseudo-axial amine 4.59 (s, IH); Pseudo-equatorial amine 4.03 (s, IH).
Step D: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure I above using N-Boc-L-alanine (Novabiochem) and the product from Step C, 3-[N'-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5- benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2Cl2/EtOAc (4:1 gradient to 5:2).
Step E: - Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2- dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared as an off-white solid. Example 8-W
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyl-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine hydrochloride
Step A: - Synthesis of 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-
1H-1 ,5-benzodiazepine
This procedure is a modification ofthe procedure described in Chan, D. M.
T. Tetrahedron Lett. 1996, 37, 9013-9016. A mixture ofthe product from
Example 8-P, Step A (1.0 eq., 7.50 g), Ph3Bi (2.2 eq., 41.26 g, Aldrich), Cu(OAc)2
(2.0 eq., 15.48 g, Aldrich), Et3N (2.0 eq., 8.62 g) in CH2CL (100 mL) was stirred under N at room temperature for 6 days (monitoring by TLC). The solids were removed by filtration through a plug of Celite rinsing with CH2CL/MeOH (3x75 mL). The filtrate was concentrated, dissolved in hot CH2Cl2/MeOH (9:1) and filtered through a large plug of silica gel eluting with CH2Cl2/MeOH (9: 1, 2L).
The filtrate was concentrated and the residue purified by flash chromatography eluting with straight CH2CL gradient to CH2Cl2/MeOH (9:1). 2,4-Dioxo-l,5-bis- phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine crystallized during concentration ofthe fractions containing the product, and was isolated by filtration as a white solid.
Step B: - Synthesis of 3-Azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyI-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
For this substrate. General Procedure 8-K was modified in the following manner. Initially the product from Step A was suspended (not a solution) in THF at -70°C, and following addition of the KN(TMS)2 solution, this suspension was allowed to warm to -20 °C over a period of 10 minutes, during which the suspension became a solution, and was re-cooled to -70 °C; then treated as described in the general procedure. The title compound was purified by trituration with hot CHCl3/hexanes (1 :1) to yield 3-azido-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyl-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine as a white solid. Step C: - Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,4-dioxo-l ,5-bis-phenyl-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-L using the product from Step B, 3-amino-
2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared as a white solid. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with
CH2CL/MeOH (98:2 gradient to 95:5, with 5% NH3 in the MeOH).
Step D: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(/-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-alaninyl]- amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH- 1,5-benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure I above using N-Boc-L-alanine (Novabiochem) and the product from Step C, 3-[N'-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-L- alaniny l]-amino-2,4-dioxo- 1 ,5-bis-phenyl-2,3 ,4,5-tetrahydro- 1 H- 1 ,5- benzodiazepine was prepared as a white foam. Purification was by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CL/EtOAc (4: 1 gradient to 3:1).
Step E: - Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis- phenyl-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5-benzodiazepine Hydrochloride
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step D, the title compound was prepared as a white amoφhous solid.
Example 8-X
Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following the method of R. G. Sherrill et al., J. Org. Chem., 1995, 60, 730-
734 and using glacial acetic acid and ΗBr gas, the title compound was prepared. Example 8-Y
Synthesis of
3-(L-VaIinyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(^ert-Butylcarbamate)-L-valinyl]- amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
(S)-3- Amino- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methy 1-5 -phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one, (lS)-7,7-dimethyl-2-oxobicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-l -methanesulfonate (Example 8-B, Step A) was free based by partitioning between methylene chloride and IM potassium carbonate. The free amine was then coupled with N-Boc-valine following General Procedure D to give the title compound.
C26H32N4O4 (MW 464.62); mass spectroscopy 464.3.
Anal. Calcd for C26H32N O : C, 67.22; H, 6.94; N, 12.06. Found: C, 67.29; H, 6.79; N, 11.20.
Step B - Synthesis of 3-(L-valinyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyI-5- phenyl-1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C and using 3-[N'-(tgr/-butylcarbamate)-L- alaninyl]-amino-2, 3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepine-2-one, the title compound was prepared as a white foam.
C2,H23N4O2 (MW 363.48); mass spectroscopy (M+H) 364.2.
Example 8-Z
Synthesis of
3-(L-tert-Leucinyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A - Synthesis of 3-[N'-( rf-Butylcarbamate)-L-te/'Meucinyl]- amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
(S)-3-amino- 1 ,3-dihydro- 1 -methyl-5-phenyl-2H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one,
( lS)-7,7-dimethyl-2-oxobicyclo[2.2.1 Jheptane- 1 -methanesulfonate (Example 8-B,
Step A) was free based by partitioning between methylene chloride and 1 M potassium carbonate. The free amine was then coupled with N-Boc-tgrt-leucine following General Procedure D to give the title compound. C27H35N O4 (MW 479.66); mass spectroscopy 479.
Step B - Synthesis of 3-(L-terf-Leucinyl)-amino-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-phenyI-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Following General Procedure 8-C and using 3-psF-(te^-t>utylcarbamate)-L- tgr/-leucinyl]-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-1.4-benzodiazepine-2- one, the title compound was prepared as a white foam.
Anal. Calcd for C22H25N4O2»0.5H2O: C. 68.19: H. 7.02; N, 14.40. Found: C, 68.24; H, 7.00; N, 14.00.
Example 8-AA
Synthesis of
3-(L-AlaninyI)-amino-2,3-dihydro-l,5-dimethyl- lH-l,4-benzodiazepine
2,3-Dihydro-l ,5-dimethyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepine was prepared following
General Procedures 8-1 (using methyl iodide), 8-D and 8-F. Coupling of this intermediate with Boc-L-alanine (Novo) using General Procedure D, followed by deprotection using General Procedure 5-B afforded the title compound which was used without further purification.
Example 8-AB
Synthesis of
3-(L-3-ThienylglycinyI)amino-2,4-dioxo- l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- lH-l,5-benzodiazepine
Step A: - Synthesis of N-(/-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-3-thienylglycine
N-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-3-thienylglycine was prepared from L-α-(3- thienyl)glycine (Sigma) by the procedure described in Bodansky, M. et al; The Practice of Peptide Synthesis; Springer Verlag; 1994, p. 17. Step B: - Synthesis of 3-[N'-(t-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-3- thienylglycinyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2- dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure D above using the product from Example 8-
V, Step C and the product from Step A above, 3-[N'-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-L-3- thienylglycinyl]-amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5-bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- lH-l,5-benzodiazepine was prepared.
Step C: - Synthesis of 3-(L-3-Thienylglycinyl)amino-2,4-dioxo-l,5- bis-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-l,5- benzodiazepine
Following General Procedure 8-N above using the product from Step B, the title compound was prepared.
Using the following procedures, the following additional intermediates can be prepared for use in this invention.
GENERAL PROCEDURE C-H
The intermediates shown in Table C-l were synthesized in parallel in using the following procedure:
Step A: To a solution of 3-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (CA No. 125:33692: 100 mg, 0.28 mmol) in 1 mL of anhydrous DMF was added 600 uL of a solution of 0.5 M potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (0.30 mmol) in toluene. Neat alkyl halide (0.56 mmol; as indicated in Table C-l) was added immediately in one portion and the reaction mixture was left undisturbed overnight. When an alkyl chloride was used, 1 equivalent of sodium iodide was added to the reaction mixture. After concentration under reduced pressure, the crude reaction residue was partitioned between methylene chloride (2 mL) and aqueous saturated bicarbonate (2 mL) and then passed through a 5 g Extralut QE cartridge (EM Science; Gibbstown, NJ) using 10 mL of methylene chloride. The resulting filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product was further purified using automated semi- preparative HPLC (YMC 20 X 50 mm Silica column; gradient elution; 0-5 % (5.5 min.), 5-20 % (3.5 min.), 20-100 % (2 min.), 100% (4 min.) ethyl acetate/methylene chloride, flow rate of 25 mL/min.). Product provided the expected M+l peak by IEX MS and were carried on without further purification and characterization.
Step B: The product obtained from Step A was dissolved in 5 mL of a 15 % TFA methylene chloride solution and allowed to stand undisturbed for 16 h. After concentration under reduced pressure, the TFA salt was dissolved in methanol and loaded directly onto a 1 g SCX column. The column was washed 3 X with 2 mL portions of methanol and the product was eluted from the column using 6 mL of 2.0 M solution of ammonia/methanol. After concentration under reduced pressure, the product were characterized by IEX MS and carried on without further purification.
Step C: To the crude product obtained from Step B (1.05 equiv.) was added sequentially a 0.3 mM stock solution of HOBt»H2O (1.05 equiv.) in DMF, a 0.3 mM stock solution of N-t-BOC-L-alanine (1.0 equiv.) in THF and 0.3 mM stock solution of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide (1.05 equiv.) in THF. After standing undisturbed for 24 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue redissolved in 2 mL of a 10% methanol/methylene chloride solution. This solution was then filtered through a pre-washed (methanol) 1 g SCX (Varian Sample Preparation) column using an additional 8 mL ofthe same solvent. For Example C-V a 1 g Si column (Varian Sample Preparation) was used). The filtrate was concentrated under a stream of nitrogen to approximately 1/3 its original volume and then passed over a plug (500 mg) of AG l-8x anion exchange resin (BioRad; Hercules, California; Columns were pre-washed with IN NaOH, water and methanol) using an additional 10 mL of methanol. The resulting filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product was carried on without further purification after characterization by IEX MS.
Step D: The crude product obtained from Step C was dissolved in 5 mL of a 15 % TFA methylene chloride solution and allowed to stand undisturbed for 16 h. After concentration under reduced pressure, the TFA salt was dissolved in methanol and loaded directly onto a 1 g SCX column. The column was washed 3 X with 2 mL portions of methanol and the product were eluted from the column using 6 mL of 2.0 M solution of ammonia/methanol. After concentration under reduced pressure, the product were characterized by IEX MS and carried on without further purification. The intermediates prepared by this method are shown in Table C-A.
TABLE C-A Intermediates
Example C-AA
Synthesis of
(S)-3-(L-phenylglycinyl)amino-
2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of (S)-3-(N'-( /*-Butoxycarbonyl)-L- phenylglycinyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
To a solution of triethyl amine (519 uL, 3.8 mmol) and (S)-3-amino-5- phenyl-2-oxo-l,4-benzodiazepine (1.0 g, 3.8 mmol) (prepared according to the procedure of M. G. Bock et al., J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 3232-3239) in 100 mL of anhydrous methylene chloride at -20 °C was added N-Boc-L-phenylglycine fluoride (Caφino et al, J. Org. Chem. 1991, 56, 261 1-2614) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min. and quenched with saturated aqueous bicarbonate (10 mL). The layers were seperated, the organic layer washed sequentially with saturated aqueous bicarbonate, water and brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification ofthe crude product using silica gel chromatography (10-50% ethyl acetate / hexane) gave 1.3 g (69%) of a hygroscopic white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 1.35 (br s, 9H), 3.41 (s, 3H), 5.30-5.45 (m, 2H), 5.75-5.95 (m, IH), 7.15-7.75 (m, 15H).
IR (CDCLJ: 1709.7. 1676.6, 1489, 1 166.3 cm"1.
IEX MS (M+l): 498.0.
Step B: Synthesis of (S)-3-(L-phenylglycinyl)amino-2,3- dihydro-l-methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
(S)-3-(N'-(/grt-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-phenylglycinyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1.27 g, 2.55 mmol) was added to 50 mL of a stirring solution of 15 % TFA in methylene chloride in one portion. After stirring 1 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in 100 mL of methylene chloride. This solution was washed twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate, once with brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification of the crude product using silica gel column chromatography (5-10% methanol/methylene chloride) gave 743 mg (73%) of a very light green foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (CDCLJ: δ = 2.05 (br s, 1 H), 3.45 (s, 3 H), 5.51 (d, J = 8.39 Hz, IH), 7.15-7.70 (m, 14 H), 8.60 (d, J = 830 Hz, 1 H).
IR (CDCLJ: 1673.3, 1601.1, 1506.1 cm"'. IEX MS (M+l): 399.2.
Example C-AB
Synthesis of
3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-
(2-oxo-2-phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-(Benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-
(2-oxo-2-phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2- one
To a solution of 3-(Benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (Bock. M. G. et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 1987, 28, 939; 4.0 g, 10.4 mmol) in 40 mL of anhydrous DMF at 0°C was added potassium tert- butoxide (1.51 g, 13.5 mmol) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred 20 min. and α-bromoacetophenone (Lancaster; Windham, NH; 2.9 g, 14.6 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature over 30 min. and then diluted with 100 mL of water and 200 mL of methylene chloride. The layers were separated. The organic layer was extracted with water and dried over sodium sulfate. Purification of the crude product by silica gel column chromatography (0-5% ethyl acetate/methylene chloride) gave 4.2 g (81%) of an off white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 5.16 (s, 2 H), 5.34 (s. 2 H), 5.50 (d, J = 8.33 Hz, 1 H), 6.70 (d, J = 8.28 Hz, 1 H), 7.20-7.70 (m, 12 H), 7.91 (d, J = 7.54 Hz, 2 H).
IR (CHC1J: 1706.04, 1685.3, 1505.9, 1489.1, 1450.3, 1244.7 cm"'.
IEX MS (M+l): 504.3.
Step B: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-2- phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of 3-(Benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-2- phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (3.7 g, 7.36 mmol) in 100 mL of anhydrous methylene chloride was cooled to 0°C under nitrogen. A stream of anhydrous HBr gas was then bubbled through this solution for 1 h. The bubbler was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature under nitrogen. After stirring 1 h the reaction was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was redissolved in 20 mL of methylene chloride. The crude HBr salt ofthe product was precipitated from solution using 300 mL of anhydrous ether and collected by filtration as a light yellow solid. After washing with ether , the solid was dissolved in methylene chloride and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The layers were separated and the organic layer was extracted with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The combined aqueous layers were then back extracted twice with methylene chloride. The combined organic layers were extracted once with water and dried over sodium sulfate. After concentration under vacuum, 2.27 g ofthe product was obtained as an orange foam which was carried on without further purification.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 2.60 (br s, 2 H), 4.72 (s, 1 H), 5.34 (s, 2 H), 7.10-7.70 (m, 12 H), 7.91 (d, J = 7.60 Hz, 2 H).
IEX MS (M+l): 370.2
Step C: Synthesis of 3-(N'-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)-L- alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-2-phenylethyl)-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
To a solution of HOBt-H2O (697 mg, 5.16 mmol), N,N- diisopropylethylamine (900 uL, 5.16 mmol) and N-t-BOC-L-alanine (975 mg, 5.16 mmol) in 20 mL of anhydrous THF at 0°C was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-
3-ethyl carbodiimide hydrochloride (EDCI; 986 mg, 5.16 mmol) in one portion.
After stirring 5 min., a solution of 3-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-2-phenylethyl)-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (2.0 g, 5.43 mmol) in 20 mL of anhydrous
THF was added via syringe and the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with 200 mL methylene chloride, extracted sequentially with 10 % citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification of the crude product using silica gel chromatography (10%-30%> ethyl acetate/methylene chloride) gave 2.59 g (93%) of a white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCIJ: δ = 1.30-1.60 (m, 12 H), 4.35 (br s, 1 H), 5.00-5.50 (m, 3 H), 5.65-5.70 (m, 1 H), 7.15-7.65 (m, 12 H), 7.70-7.80 (m, 1 H), 7.85-7.95 (m, 1 H).
IR (CHCLJ: 1705.8, 1678.8, 1488.7, 1450.2, 1230.4, 1 164.4 cm"1.
IEX MS (M+l): 541.2.
Step D: Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-
2-phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
3-(N'-(tgrt-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-oxo-2- phenylethyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (2.5 g, 4.63 mmol) was added to 100 mL of a stirring solution of 15 % TFA methylene chloride in one portion. After stirring 2 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in 150 mL of methylene chloride. This solution was washed twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate, once with brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification of the crude product using silica gel column chromatography (1-10% methanol/methylene chloride) gave 1.91 g (94%) of the title compound as a white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 1.30-1.50 (m, 3 H), 1.80-2.20 (br s, 2 H), 3.55-3.75 (m, 1 H), 5.20-5.45 (m, 2 H), 5.67 (t, J = 7.48 Hz, 1 H), 7.20-7.65 (m, 12 H). 7.90 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 2 H). 8.80 (dd, J, = 25.09 Hz, J2 = 8.33 Hz, 1 H).
EX MS (M+l): 441.2.
Example C-AC
Synthesis of
3-(L-AIaniny l)amino-2,3-dihydro- 1 -
(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)-5-pheny.-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one Step A: Synthesis of 3-(Benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-
(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2- one
To a solution of 3-(benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (3.7 g, 9.61 mmol) in 40 mL of anhydrous DMF at 0°C was added potassium tgrt-butoxide (1.6 g, 14.4 mmol) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred 20 min. and 4,4,4-trifluoro- 1 -bromobutane (Lancaster; Windham, NH; 2.6 g, 13.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature over 30 min. and then diluted with 100 mL of water and 200 mL of methylene chloride. The layers were separated. The organic layer was extracted with water and dried over sodium sulfate. Purification ofthe crude product by silica gel column chromatography (0-3 % ethyl acetate / methylene chloride) gave 1.52 g (32 %) of an off white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 1.50-2.10 (m, 4 H), 3.70-3.90 (m, 1 H), 4.35-4.55 (m, 1 H), 5.15 (s, 2 H), 5.33 (d, J = 8.47 Hz, 1 H), 6.67 (d, J = 8.40 Hz, 1 H), 7.2-7.70 (m, 14 H).
IR (CHClj): 1720.4, 1683.0, 1604.8, 1505.5, 1451.1, 1323.9, 1254.5, 1148.4 cm '.
IEX MS (M+l): 496.3.
Step B: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(4,4,4- trifluorobutyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of 3-(benzoxycarbonyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(4,4,4- trifluorobutyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1.42 g, 2.87 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous methylene chloride was cooled to 0°C under nitrogen. A stream of anhydrous HBr gas was slowly bubbled through the solution for 1 h. The bubbler was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature under nitrogen. After stirring for 1 h, the reaction was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was redissolved in 10 mL of methylene chloride. The crude HBr salt of the product was precipitated from solution using 90 mL of anhydrous ether and collected by filtration. After washing with ether, the HBr salt was dissolved in methylene chloride and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The layers were separated and the organic layer was extracted with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The combined aqueous layers were then back extracted twice with methylene chloride. The combined organic layers were extracted once with water and dried over sodium sulfate. After concentration under vacuum, 1.06 g (100%) ofthe product was obtained as a white foam which was carried on without further purification.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 1.60-2.10 (m, 4 H), 2.76 (br s, 2 H), 3.75- 3.85 (m. 1 H), 4.40-4.60 (m, 2 H), 7.20-7.70 (m, 9 H).
IEX MS (M+l): 362.1.
Step C: Synthesis of 3-(N'-(/er/-ButoxycarbonyI)-L- alaninyι)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(4,4,4-trifluorobutyι)-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
To a solution of HOBt-H2O (373 mg, 2.76 mmol), N,N- diisopropylethylamine (481 uL, 2.76 mmol) and N-t-BOC-L-alanine (522 mg, 2.76 mmol) in 10 mL of anhydrous THF at 0°C was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)- 3-ethyl carbodiimide hydrochloride (EDCI; 527 mg, 2.76 mmol) in one portion. After stirring 5 min.. a solution of 3-amino-2.3-dihydro- l-(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)-5- phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1.05 g, 2.91 mmol) in 10 mL of anhydrous THF was added via syringe and the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with 100 mL methylene chloride, extracted sequentially with 10% citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification of the crude product using silica gel chromatography (10%>-30% ethyl acetate/methylene chloride) gave 1.28 g (83%>) of a white foam.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 1.40-2.10 (m, 16 H), 3.70-3.85 (m, 1 H), 4.30-4.55 (m, 2 H), 5.10 (br s, 1 H), 5.45-5.55 (m, 1 H), 7.25-7.80 (m, 10 H). IR (CDCLJ: 1676.6, 1605.2, 1488.6, 1450.9, 1393.2, 1338.7, 1324.9, 1253.8, 1150.4 cm-'.
IEX MS (M+l): 533.1.
Step D: Synthesis of 3-(L-Alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(4,4,4- trifluorobutyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
3-(N'-(tgrt-Butoxycarbonyl)-L-alaninyl)amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(4,4,4- trifluorobutyl)-5-phenyl-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (1.21 g, 2.27 mmol) was added to 50 mL of a stirring solution of 15 % TFA / methylene chloride in one portion. After stirring 2 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in 100 mL of methylene chloride. This solution was washed twice with saturated sodium bicarbonate, once with brine and then dried over sodium sulfate. Purification ofthe crude product using silica gel column chromatography (1-5% methanol / methylene chloride) gave 670 mg (68%>) of a light pink foam.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 1.43 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3 H), 1.60-2.20 (m, 7 H), 3.60-3.85 (m, 2 H), 4.35-4.55 (m, 1 H), 5.51 (dd, J, = 8.36 Hz, J2 = 2.48 Hz, 1 H), 7.20-7.70 (m, 9 H), 8.80 (dd, J, = 27.73 Hz, J2 = 8.34 Hz. 1 H).
IEX MS (M+l): 433.2.
Example C-AE
Synthesis of
3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2- pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized as described in Synth. Commun.,
26(4), 721-727 (1996). Step B: Synthesis of 3-[(N-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2-pyridyι)-lH- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of L-Boc-alanine (1.74 g, 9.20 mmol), HOBt monohydrate (1.24 g, 9.20 mmol), diisopropylethylamime (1.6 mL, 9.20 mmol) and CH2CL (30 mL) was purged with nitrogen and cooled in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodimide hydrochloride (1.76 g, 9.20 mmol) followed by a solution of 3-amino-2, 3-dihydro- l-methyl-5-(2 -pyridyl)- 1H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (2.45 g, 9.20 mmol) dissolved in CH2CL (15 mL). The cold bath was removed and the solution stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was extracted with H2O, 0.1 N aq. citric acid, 5% aq. NaHCO3, and brine. The remaining CH2CL solution was dried (MgSOJ and concentrated to a tan foam. The title compound was crystallized from CH2CL/EtOAc to give 3.47 g (86% yield) of white crystals, mp. 228-229°C.
Anal. Calcd for C23H27N5O4: C, 63.14; H, 6.22; N, 16.01. Found: C, 63.25; H, 6.15; N, 15.95. MS (FD+) 437 m/z.
Step C: Synthesis of 3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(2-pyridyI)-l H-l ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of 3-[(N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-L-alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (3.42 g, 7.82 mmol) in CH2CL (90 mL) was cooled in an ice bath and treated with TFA (13.2 mL, 172 mmol). The cold bath was removed and the solution stirred at room temperature for four hours. The reaction mixture was washed with 1 M aq. K2CO3 and the aqueous back-extracted with CH2CL. The combined extracts were washed with H2O, dried (MgSOJ and concentrated to obtain 1.75 g (66% yield) ofthe title compound as an off-white foam. MS (IS+) 338 (m/e).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 8.76-8.86 (IH, m), 8.63 (IH, m), 8.17 (IH, m), 7.82 (2H, m), 7.60 (IH, m), 7.41 (3H, m), 5.60 (IH, m), 3.63 (IH, m), 3.49 (3H, s), 1.66 (2H, broad), 1.45 (3 H, m). Example C-AF
Synthesis of
3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-N,N-diethylaminoethyl)-
5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-N,N- diethylaminoethyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin- 2-one
The title compound was synthesized as described in Synth. Commun.,
26(4), 721-727 (1996).
Step B: Synthesis of 3-[(N-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-L- aIaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-N,N- diethylaminoethyι)-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin- 2-one
A solution of L-Boc-alanine (1.80 g, 9.50 mmol), HOBt monohydrate (1.28 g, 9.50 mmol), diisopropylethylamime (1.65 mL, 9.50 mmol) and CH2CL (40 mL) was purged with nitrogen and cooled in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodimide hydrochloride (1.82 g, 9.50 mmol) followed by a solution of 3-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-N,N- diethylaminoethyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (3.34 g, 9.50 mmol) dissolved in CH2CL (25 mL). The cold bath was removed and the solution stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was extracted with H2O, 5% aq. NaHCO3, and brine. The remaining CH2CL solution was dried (MgSOJ and concentrated to a tan foam. The title compound was isolated via column chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2CL to 10% MeOH/CH2CL) to give 3.53 g (71% yield) of yellow foam.
MS (FDJ 522 (m/z).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 8.62 (IH, d), 8.11 (IH, m), 7.80 (2H, m), 7.59 (2H, m), 7.32-7.45 (2H, m), 5.54 (IH, m), 5.02-5.18 (IH, m), 4.38 (IH, m), 4.20 (IH, m), 3.83 (IH, m), 2.62 (2H, t), 2.44 (4H, m), 1.40-1.56 (12H, m), 0.88 (6H, m). Step C: Synthesis of 3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-(2-
N,N-diethylaminoethyl)- 5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized using the procedure described in Example C-AE, Step C. A solution of 3-[(N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro- 1 -(2-N,N-diethylaminoethyl)-5-(2 -pyridyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (3.52 g, 6.73 mmol) was treated with TFA (11.4 mL, 148 mmol) to give 2.61 g (92% yield) the title compound as a light yellow foam.
MS (IS+) 423 (m/e).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 8.78-8.93 (IH, m), 8.62 (lH,d), 8.11 (IH, m), 7.80 (2H, m), 7.58 (2H, m), 7.39 (2H, m), 5.58 (IH, m), 4.22 (IH, m), 3.88 (IH, m), 3.61 (IH, m), 2.67 (2H, t), 2.49 (4H, m), 1.73 (2H, broad), 1.42 (3H, m), 0.91 (6H, m).
Example C-AG
Synthesis of
3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro- 1 -(3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-
5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-(3,3-dimethyl-2- oxobuty f)-5-(2-py ridy 1)- 1 H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized as described in Synth. Commun. ,
26(4), 721-727 (1996).
Step B: Synthesis of 3-[(N-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-(3,3-dimethyl-2- oxobutyl)- 5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of L-Boc-alanine (1.57 g, 8.33 mmol), HOBt monohydrate (1.13 g, 8.33 mmol), diisopropylethylamime (1.45 mL, 8.33 mmol) and CH2CL (40 mL) was purged with nitrogen and cooled in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodimide hydrochloride (1.60 g, 8.33 mmol) followed by a solution of 3 -amino-2,3 -dihydro- 1 -(3,3 -dimethyl-2- oxobutyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (2.92 g, 8.33 mmol) dissolved in CH2CL (25 mL). The cold bath was removed and the solution stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was extracted with H2O, 0.1 N aq. citric acid, 5% aq. NaHCO3, and brine. The remaining CH2C12 solution was dried (MgSOJ and concentrated to a yellow foam. The title compound was isolated via column chromatography (20% EtOAc/hexanes to 60% EtOAc/hexanes) to give 4.19 g (96% yield) of light yellow foam.
MS (FD+) 521 (m z).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 8.65 (IH, t), 8.17 (IH, t), 7.90 (IH, t), 7.71-7.85 (IH, m), 7.54 (IH, m), 7.44 (IH, t), 7.37 (IH, d), 7.24-7.32 (IH, m), 7.14 (IH, m), 5.67 (IH, dd), 5.18 (IH, broad), 4.93-5.07 (IH, m), 4.50-4.64 (IH, m), 4.38 (IH, broad), 1.42-1.51 (12H, m), 1.26 (9H, d).
Step C: Synthesis of 3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-(3,3- dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)-lH-l,4- benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized using the procedure described in Example C-AE, Step C. A solution of 3-[(N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino] -2,3 -dihydro- 1 -(3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-5-(2-pyridyl)- 1 H- 1 ,4- benzodiazepin-2-one (4.18 g, 8.01 mmol) was treated with TFA (13.6 mL, 176 mmol) to give 3.14 g (93%) yield) the title compound as an off-white foam.
MS (IS+) 422 (m e).
'HNMR (CDC1J δ 8.85-8.99 (IH, m), 8.68 (IH, d), 8.20 (IH, t), 7.87 (IH, t), 7.58 (IH, t), 7.42 ( 2H, m), 7.30 (IH, t), 7.17 (IH, d), 5.72 (IH, m), 5.08 (IH, d), 4.60 (IH, d), 3.66 (IH, m), 1.47 (3H, m), 1.28 (9H, m).
Example C-AH
Synthesis of
3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-
5-(2-thiazyl)-l H- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyI-5-(2-thiazyl)-
1H-1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized in a manner similar to the procedure described in Synth. Commun., 26(4), 721-727 (1996), starting with 2-(2- aminobenzoyl)thiazole (prepared as described in Tetrahedron, 51(3), 773-786, (1995)).
MS (IS+) 273 (m/e).
■HNMR (CDC1J: δ = 7.83-7.94 (2H, m), 7.61 (IH, t), 7.50 (IH, d), 7.34 (2H, m), 4.60 (IH, s), 3.46 (3H, s), 1.97 (2H, broad).
Step B: Synthesis of 3-[(N-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2-thiazyl)-lH- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
A solution of L-Boc-alanine (1.85 g, 9.77 mmol), HOBt monohydrate (1.32 g, 9.77 mmol), diisopropylethylamime (1.70 mL, 9.77 mmol) and CH2C12 (30 mL) was purged with nitrogen and cooled in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodimide hydrochloride (1.87 g, 9.77 mmol) followed by a solution of 3-amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2-thiazyl)-lH- 1 ,4-benzodiazepin-2-one (2.66 g, 9.77 mmol) dissolved in CH2CL (20 mL). The cold bath was removed and the solution stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was extracted with H2O, 0.1 N aq. citric acid, 5% aq. NaHCO3, and brine. The remaining CH2CL solution was dried (MgSOJ and concentrated to a light yellow foam. The title compound was crystallized from EtOAc/hexane to give 3.22 g (74% yield) of white crystals, mp. 196-197°C. Anal. Calcd for
C2,H25N5O4S: C, 56.87; H, 5.68; N, 15.79. Found: C, 56.74; H, 5.75; N, 15.55.
MS (IS J 444 m/e.
Step C: Synthesis of 3-[(L-AIaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(2-thiazyl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized using the procedure described in
Example C-AE, Step C. Example C-AI
Synthesis of 3-[(L-Alaninyι)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl- 5-(thiophen-2-yl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
Step A: Synthesis of 3-Amino-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(2- thiophen-2-yl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized in a manner similar to the procedure described in Synth. Commun., 26(4), 721-727 (1996), starting with 2-(2- aminobenzoyl)thiophene (prepared as described in Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun., 34(2), 468-478, (1969)).
MS (IS*) 272 (m e).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 7.68 (IH, d), 7.60 (IH, t), 7.48 (IH, m), 7.35 (2H, d), 7.28 (IH, m), 7.15 (IH, d), 7.05 (IH, d), 4.50 (IH, broad), 3.45 (3H, s), 2.26 (2H, broad).
Step B: Synthesis of 3-[(N-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-L- alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l-methyl-5-(thiophen-2-yι)- lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized in a manner similar to the procedure described in Example C-AH, Step B.
MS (IS*) 443 (m e).
■HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 7.69 (IH, d), 7.61 (2H, m), 7.48 (IH, d), 7.27-7.42 (2H, m), 7.18 (IH, m), 7.05 (IH, m), 5.51 (IH, d), 5.13 (IH, broad), 4.36 (IH, broad), 3.44 (3H, s), 1.38-1.57 (12H, m).
Step C: Synthesis of 3-[(L-Alaninyl)amino]-2,3-dihydro-l- methyl-5-(thiophen-2-yl)-lH-l,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
The title compound was synthesized in a manner similar to the procedure described in Example C-AE, Step C.
MS (IS+) 343 (m e).
'HNMR (CDCLJ: δ = 8.55 (IH, d), 7.68 (IH, d), 7.59 (IH, m), 7.48 (IH, d), 7.36 (IH. d), 7.31 ( IH, d), 7.16 (IH, m), 7.04 (IH, t), 5.54 (IH, d), 3.58 (IH, m), 3.45 (3H, s), 1.41 (3H, d). Example 1
Synthesis of
5-[N'-(2S-hydroxy-3-methylbutyryl)-2S-aminopropyl]amino-
7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one
Step A - Synthesis of N-Boc-L-Alaninal
Methylene chloride (50 mL) was added to a flask equipped with an addition funnel and cooled to -78°C before adding 1.6 mL oxalyl chloride (18.3 mmol, 2.4 eq). This was stirred for 5 minutes, at which time 1.8 mL dimethyl sulfoxide (25.4 mmol, 3.3 eq) dissolved in 20 mL CH2Cl2was added over 5 minutes. This was stirred for an additional 5 minutes before adding 1.4 g N-Boc-L-alaninol (7.8 mmol, 1.0 eq) (Aldrich) in 20 mL CH2C12. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 minutes before 6.5 mL triethylamine (46.6 mmol, 6.0 eq) was added and the reaction warmed to room temperature for 10 minutes. The reaction was quenched with 200 mL 0.1 N aqueous HCl, and this was extracted with 2 x 100 mL CH2C12.
The combined organic layers were washed with 100 mL saturated NaHCO3 followed by 100 mL saturated NaCl, then dried over Na SO4 and removed in vacuo. The remaining oil was passed through a silica gel plug with ethyl acetate
(EtOAc). The solvent was removed in vacuo to yield 1.14 g (85%) ofthe desired product.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 9.56 (s, IH, CHO), 5.06 (bs, IH, NH), 4.24 (bq, IH, CH), 1.45 (s, 9H. C(CH , 1.33 (d, 3H, J= 7.2 Hz, CHCHJ.
M+ (ionspray) Calcd for C8Η15 NO3 173.2, Obs. 174.2 (M + IH).
Step B - Synthesis of 5-[N'-(tert-butyloxycarbonyP-2S- aminopropyl]-amino-7-methyl-5.7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
To a solution of 620 mg of 5-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (2.6 mmol, 1.0 eq) (from Example 7-A) in 50 mL methanol was added 653 mg of N-Boc-L-alaninal (3.8 mmol, 1.4 eq) (from Step A), followed by 74 mg of sodium cyanoborohydride (1.2 mmol, 0.5 eq). This was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour after which the solvent was removed. The resulting solid was dissolved in 50 mL methylene chloride and washed with 50 mL aqueous saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was re-extracted with 50 mL methylene chloride. The combined organic solvents were dried over Na2SO4 and removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (1 :1 hexanes:ethyl acetate) to yield 309 mg (30%>) ofthe desired product.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDCLJ: δ = 7.64-7.31 (m, 8H, aromatic Hs), 4.04 (bs, IH, CHN), 3.73 (bs, IH, CHCHJ, 3.34 (s, 3H, NCHJ, 2.78 (dd, IH, J= 4.9, 12.0 Hz, CHHN), 2.48 (dd, IH, J= 6.8, 12.0 Hz, CHHN), 1.43 (s, 9Η, CCHJ, 1.17 (d, 3H, J= 6.8 Hz, CHCHJ.
M+ (ionspray) Calcd for C23Η29N3O3 395.5, Obs. 396.1 (M + IH).
Step C - Synthesis of 5-(2S-aminopropyL-amino-7-methyl-5.7- dihydro-6H-dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one HCl (g) was bubbled through a solution of 317 mg of 5-[N'-(tert- butyloxycarbonyl)-2S-aminopropyl]amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-6H- dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (0.8 mmol) (from Step B) in 30 mL dioxane for 15 minutes. This was stirred at room temperature for 17 hours at which time the solvent was removed in vacuo to yield 248 mg (94 %) of a white solid. This was used without further purification.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) 7.73-7.45 (m, 8H, aromatic Hs), 3.76 (m, IH, CHCHJ, 3.38 (m, 5H, NCH3 and CH2N), 1.46 (d, 3H, J= 6.4 Hz, CHCHJ.
M+ (ionspray) Calcd for C18Η2lN3O 295.4, Obs. 296.4 (M + IH).
Step D - Synthesis of 5-[N,-(2S-hvdroxy-3-methylbutyrylV2S- aminopropyl]amino-7-methyl-5.7-dihvdro-6H- dibenz[b.d]azepin-6-one
To a solution of 240 mg 5-(2S-aminopropyl)-amino-7-methyl-5,7-dihydro-
6H-dibenz[b,d]azepin-6-one (0.8 mmol, 1.0 eq) (from Step C) in 25 mL 4:1 tetrahydrofuran (THF): dimethylformamide (DMF) was added 125 mg of 2S-2- hydroxy-3 -methy lbutyric acid (1.1 mmol, 1.3 eq), 184 mg of N-ethyl-N'-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-carbodiimide (1.0 mmol, 1.2 eq), 139 mg 1- hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (0.9 mmol, 1.1 eq), and 0.5 mL of diisopropylethylamine (2.9 mmol, 3.5 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The solvent was removed and the remaining oil diluted with 30 mL CH2CL and washed with 25 mL 0.1 N aqueous HCl. The aqueous layer was back extracted with 25 mL CH2C12. The combined orgainc layers were dried over Na2SO4 and removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate) to yield 38 mg (12 %>) of the desired product as a white solid.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC1J: δ = 7.62-7.37 (m, 8H, aromatic Hs), 6.67 (d, 1H, J= 9.0 Hz, NHCO) 4.61 (m, IH, CHCHJ, 4.40 (bs, IH, CHNH), 4.13 (d, 1Η, J= 3.8 Ηz, CHOΗ), 3.38 (s, 3Η, NCHJ, 2.95 (m, 2H, CH2NH), 2.10 (m, IH, CH(CH3)2), 1.26 (d, 3H, J= 6.4 Hz, CHCHJ, 1.06 (d, 3Η, J= 6.8 Hz, CH(CH3)2), 0.93 (d, 3Η, J= 6.8 Hz, CH(CH3)2).
M+ (ionspray) Calcd for C23Η29N3O3 395.5, Obs. 396.1 (M + IH).
Anal. Calcd for C23H29N3O3 C, 69.85; H, 7.39; N, 10.62. Found: C, 69.63; H, 7.44; N, 10.32.
Additionally, using the procedures described herein as well as art recognized starting materials, reagents and procedures, compounds of formula I can be prepared wherein the portion ofthe compound having the formula -NH-W is selected from the following structures (where, when undefined, X, Y and Z represent aryl ring substitutes):
X = S02 , R' = H X = Cλ R' = F
R' = Me, isopropyl, cyclohexyl
HN Nγ/A HNA N
H
Example 2 Cellular Screen for the Detection of Inhibitors of β-Amyloid Production
A compound of formula I above was assayed for its ability to inhibit β- amyloid production in a cell line possessing the Swedish mutation. This screening assay employed cells (K293 = human kidney cell line) which were stably transfected with the gene for amyloid precursor protein 751 (APP751) containing the double mutation Lys65ιMet652 to Asn65ιLeu652 (APP751 numbering) in the manner described in International Patent Application Publication No. 94/10569s and Citron et al.16. This mutation is commonly called the Swedish mutation and the cells, designated as "293 751 SWE", were plated in Corning 96-well plates at 2-4 x 104 cells per well in Dulbecco's minimal essential media (Sigma, St. Louis. MO) plus 10% fetal bovine serum. Cell number is important in order to achieve β- amyloid ELISA results within the linear range of the assay (-0.2 to 2.5 ng per mL).
Following overnight incubation at 37 °C in an incubator equilibrated with 10% carbon dioxide, media were removed and replaced with 200 μL of a compound of formula I (drug) containing media per well for a two hour pretreatment period and cells were incubated as above. Drug stocks were prepared in 100% dimethyl sulfoxide such that at the final drug concentration used in the treatment, the concentration of dimethyl sulfoxide did not exceed 0.5% and, in fact, usually equaled 0.1 %.
At the end ofthe pretreatment period, the media were again removed and replaced with fresh drug containing media as above and cells were incubated for an additional two hours. After treatment, plates were centrifuged in a Beckman GPR at 1200 rpm for five minutes at room temperature to pellet cellular debris from the conditioned media. From each well, 100 μL of conditioned media or appropriate dilutions thereof were transferred into an ELISA plate precoated with antibody 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327] against amino acids 13-28 of β-amyloid peptide as described in International Patent Application Publication No. 94/105698 and stored at 4°C overnight. An ELISA assay employing labelled antibody 3D6 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327]17 against amino acids 1-5 of β-amyloid peptide was run the next day to measure the amount of β-amyloid peptide produced.
Cytotoxic effects ofthe compounds were measured by a modification ofthe method of Hansen, et al.18. To the cells remaining in the tissue culture plate was added 25 μL of a 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) (Sigma, St. Louis, MO) stock solution (5 mg/mL) to a final concentration of 1 mg/mL. Cells were incubated at 37°C for one hour, and cellular activity was stopped by the addition of an equal volume of MTT lysis buffer (20% w/v sodium dodecylsulfate in 50% dimethylformamide, pH 4.7). Complete extraction was achieved by overnight shaking at room temperature. The difference in the OD562nm and the OD650nm was measured in a Molecular Device's UVma microplate reader as an indicator of the cellular viability.
The results of the β-amyloid peptide ELISA were fit to a standard curve and expressed as ng/mL β-amyloid peptide. In order to normalize for cytotoxicity, these results were divided by the MTT results and expressed as a percentage of the results from a drug free control. All results are the mean and standard deviation of at least six replicate assays.
The test compound was assayed for β-amyloid peptide production inhibition activity in cells using this assay. The results of this assay demonstrate that the compounds of formula I inhibit β-amyloid peptide production by at least 30% as compared to the control when employed at 10 μg/mL. Example 3 In Vivo Suppression of β-Amyloid Release and/or Synthesis
This example illustrates how the compounds of this invention could be tested for in vivo suppression of β-amyloid release and/or synthesis. For these experiments, 3 to 4 month old PDAPP mice are used [Games et al., (1995) Nature 373:523-527].19 Depending upon which compound is being tested, the compound is usually formulated at between 1 and 10 mg/mL. Because ofthe low solubility factors of the compounds, they may be formulated with various vehicles, such as corn oil (Safeway, South San Francisco. CA); 10% ethanol in corn oil; 2- hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin (Research Biochemicals International, Natick MA); and carboxy-methyl-cellulose (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO).
The mice are dosed subcutaneously with a 26 gauge needle and 3 hours later the animals are euthanized via CO2 narcosis and blood is taken by cardiac puncture using a 1 cc 25G 5/8" tuberculin syringe/needle coated with solution of 0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0. The blood is placed in a Becton-Dickinson vacutainer tube containing EDTA and spun down for 15 minutes at 1500 xg at 5°C. The brains of the mice are then removed and the cortex and hippocampus are dissected out and placed on ice.
1. Brain Assay
To prepare hippocampal and cortical tissue for enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs) each brain region is homogenized in 10 volumes of ice cold guanidine buffer (5.0 M guanidine-HCl, 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0) using a Kontes motorized pestle (Fisher, Pittsburgh PA). The homogenates are gently rocked on a rotating platform for three to four hours at room temperature and stored at -20 °C prior to quantitation of β-amyloid.
The brain homogenates are diluted 1 : 10 with ice-cold casein buffer [0.25%o casein, phosphate buffered saline (PBS), 0.05%) sodium azide, 20 μg/ml aprotinin, 5 mM EDTA, pH 8.0, 10 μg/ml leupeptin], thereby reducing the final concentration of guanidine to 0.5 M, before centrifugation at 16,000 xg for 20 minutes at 4°C. Samples are further diluted, if necessary, to achieve an optimal range for the ELISA measurements by the addition of casein buffer with 0.5 M guanidine hydrochloride added. The β-amyloid standards (1-40 or 1-42 amino acids) were prepared such that the final composition equaled 0.5 M guanidine in the presence of 0.1 %> bovine serum albumin (BSA).
The total β-amyloid sandwich ELISA, quantitating both β-amyloid (aa 1- 40) and β-amyloid (aa 1-42) consists of two monoclonal antibodies (mAb) to β- amyloid. The capture antibody, 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327], is specific to amino acids 13 - 28 of β-amyloid. The antibody 3D6 [Johnson- Wood et al., PNAS USA (1997) 94: 1550-1555],20 which is specific to amino acids 1 - 5 of β- amyloid, is biotinylated and served as the reporter antibody in the assay. The 3D6 biotinylation procedure employs the manufacturer's (Pierce, Rockford IL) protocol for NHS-biotin labeling of immunoglobulins except that 100 mM sodium bicarbonate, pH 8.5 buffer is used. The 3D6 antibody does not recognize secreted amyloid precursor protein (APP) or full-length APP but detects only β-amyloid species with an amino terminal aspartic acid. The assay has a lower limit of sensitivity of -50 pg/ml (11 pM) and shows no cross-reactivity to the endogenous murine β-amyloid peptide at concentrations up to 1 ng/ml.
The configuration ofthe sandwich ELISA quantitating the level of β- amyloid (aa 1-42) employs the mAb 21 FI 2 [Johnson- Wood et al., PNAS USA (1997) 94:1550-1555] (which recognizes amino acids 33-42 of β-amyloid) as the capture antibody. Biotinylated 3D6 is also the reporter antibody in this assay which has a lower limit of sensitivity of -125 pg/ml (28 pM).
The 266 and 21F12 capture mAbs are coated at 10 μg/ml into 96 well immunoassay plates (Costar, Cambidge MA) overnight at room temperature. The plates are then aspirated and blocked with 0.25% human serum albumin in PBS buffer for at least 1 hour at room temperature, then stored desiccated at 4°C until use. The plates are rehydrated with wash buffer (Tris-buffered saline, 0.05% Tween 20) prior to use. The samples and standards are added to the plates and incubated overnight at 4°C. The plates are washed > 3 times with wash buffer between each step ofthe assay. The biotinylated 3D6, diluted to 0.5 μg/ml in casein incubation buffer (0.25% casein, PBS, 0.05% Tween 20, pH 7.4) is incubated in the well for 1 hour at room temperature. Avidin-HRP (Vector, Burlingame CA) diluted 1 :4000 in casein incubation buffer is added to the wells for 1 hour at room temperature. The colorimetric substrate, Slow TMB-ELISA (Pierce, Cambridge MA), is added and allowed to react for 15 minutes, after which the enzymatic reaction is stopped with addition of 2 N H2SO4. Reaction product is quantified using a Molecular Devices Vmax (Molecular Devices, Menlo Park CA) measuring the difference in absorbance at 450 nm and 650 nm.
2. Blood Assay
The EDTA plasma is diluted 1 : 1 in specimen diluent (0.2 gm/1 sodium phosphate'F O (monobasic). 2.16 gm 1 sodium phosphate »7H2O (dibasic), 0.5gm/l thimerosal. 8.5 gm/1 sodium chloride, 0.5 ml Triton X-405, 6.0 g/1 globulin-free bovine serum albumin; and water). The samples and standards in specimen diluent are assayed using the total β-amyloid assay (266 capture/3D6 reporter) described above for the brain assay except the specimen diluent was used instead ofthe casein diluents described.
Formulations other than those described above can also be used for oral delivery and intravenous delivery to a mammal. For oral delivery, the compound can be mixed with either 100% corn oil or, alternatively, in a solution comtaining 80% corn oil, 19.5%) oleic acid and 0.5% labrafil. The compound can be mixed with the above solutions in concentrations ranging from 1 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL. The compound in solution is preferably administered orally to the mammal at a dose volume of 5 mL/kg of body weight. For IV delivery, the compound is preferably mixed with a solution of 3% ethanol, 3%> solutol HS-15 and 94% saline. The compound is preferably mixed with the above solution in concentrations ranging from 0.25 mg/mL to 5 mg/mL. The compound in solution is preferably administered by IV to the mammal at a dose volume of 2 mL/kg of body weight.
From the foregoing description, various modifications and changes in the composition and method will occur to those skilled in the art. All such modifications coming within the scope of the appended claims are intended to be included therein.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of β-amyloid peptide wherein said compounds are represented by formula I:
wherein
W is a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
CH— C — NH- -(CH) — NH- or O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2')a-NH-;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substituted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- ;
Z is represented by the foπnula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to 6;
/is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
2. A method for preventing the onset of AD in a human patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I:
wherein
W is a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
CH— C— NH- -(CH)a— NH- or
O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2 -NH-;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substituted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- ;
Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to 6;
/ is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
3. A method for treating a human patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I:
Y
R1 NH -w
wherein
Wi a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
CH— C — NH- -(CH)a— NH- or O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2)a-NH-;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl. alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl. substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl. substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substituted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- ;
Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to 6;
/is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
4. The method according to any of Claims 1 , 2, or 3 wherein a is 2.
5. The method according to Claim 4 wherein rings A and B are preferably independently selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
6. The method according to Claim 5 wherein rings A and B are independently aryl.
7. The method according to Claim 4 wherein m is zero.
8. The method according to Claim 7 wherein R1 is aryl or heteroaryl.
9. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl.
(b) a substituted phenyl group ofthe formula:
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido. cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring wherein the heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring contains from 3 to 8 atoms of which from 1 to 3 are heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano. trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl, (d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl,
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group, and
(g) alkyl.
10. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of mono-, di- and tri-substituted phenyl groups.
11. The method according to Claim 10 wherein R1 is a disubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl, 3.4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl. 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl. and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
12. The method according to Claim 10 wherein R1 is a monosubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-iodophenyl, 4- (phenylcarbonyl)-phenyl, and 4-(l -ethoxy )ethylphenyl.
13. The method according to Claim 10 wherein R1 is a trisubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl and 3,4,5- trichlorophenyl.
14. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R1 is selected from 2- naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, 5-indolyl, and phenyl.
15. The method according to Claim 4 wherein m is one.
16. The method according to Claim 15 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of phenyl. 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2- fluorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl. 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2- methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl. 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl. 4-butoxyphenyl, 4- .rø-propylphenyl, 4- phenoxyphenyl, 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-hydroxymethylphenyl, 3- methoxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3-bromophenyl. 3-phenoxyphenyl. 3-thiomethoxyphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3- trifluoromethy lphenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl, 2,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl. 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl. 3,4- methylenedioxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 3.5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl. 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl. 2,4- dichlorophenyl, 2.4-difluorophenyl. 2.6-difluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl, 3,4,5-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl. 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,3,5-trifluorophenyl. 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl. 4- fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 2-fluoro-4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- benzyloxyphenyl, 2-chloro-6-fluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-6-chlorophenyl, 2.3,4.5,6- pentafluorophenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl. 4-phenylphenyl, 2-fluoro-3- trifluoromethylphenyl, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4- phenyl-rø-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wo-propyl, iso-butyl, «-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, wo-valeryl. «-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1-enyl. cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-cyclopentyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH -cyclobutyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopentyl, pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, fluoropyridyls (including 5-fluoropyrid-3-yl), chloropyridyls (including 5-chloropyrid-3-yl), thien-2-yl, thien-3-yl, benzothiazol- 4-yl, 2-phenylbenzoxazol-5-yl, furan-2-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, thionaphthen-2-yl, thionaphthen-3-yl, thionaphthen-4-yl, 2-chlorothiophen-5-yl, 3-methylisoxazol-5- yl, 2-(thiophenyl)thien-5-yl, 6-methoxythionaphthen-2-yl, 3-phenyl- 1,2,4- thiooxadiazol-5-yl, 2-phenyloxazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, l-phenyl-tetraol-5-yl, allyl, 2- (cyclohexyl)ethyl, (CH3)2CH=CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)-, φC(O)CH2-. thien-2-yl- methyl, 2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl. 3-(thien-2-yl)-«-propyl, 2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4- methoxyphenyl)ethyl. norboran-2-yl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (2- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4- hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methylphenyl)methyl, (4- fluorophenyl)methyl, (4-fluorophenoxy)methyl, (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, (4- chlorophenyl)methyl, (2-chlorophenyl)methyl, (l-phenyl)ethyl, (\-(p- chlorophenyl)ethyl, ( 1 -trifluoromethyl)ethyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)ethyl, CH3OC(O)CH2-, benzylthiomethyl, 5-(methoxycarbonyl)-«-pentyl, 3- (methoxycarbonyl)-«-propyl. indan-2-yl, (2-methylbenzofuran-3-yl), methoxymethyl, CH3CH=CH-, CH3CH2CH=CH-, (4-chlorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-fluorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-methoxyphenyl)C(O)CH . 4-(fluorophenyl)- NHC(O)CH2-, 1-phenyl-n-butyl, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, (CH3)2NC(O)CH2-, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, methylcarbonylmethyl, (2,4-dimethylphenyl)C(O)CH2-. 4-methoxyphenyl-C(O)CH2-, phenyl-C(O)CH2-, CH3C(O)N(φ)-, ethenyl, methylthiomethyl, (CH3)3CNHC(O)CH2-, 4-fluorophenyl-C(O)CH2-, diphenylmethyl, phenoxymethyl, 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl-CH2-, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, (CH3)3COC(O)NHCH2-, trαrø-styryl, H2NC(O)CH2CH2-, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl-C(O)CH2, φC(O)NHCH(φ)CH2-, mesityl, CH3CH(=NHOH)CH2-, 4-CH3-φ-NHC(O)CH2CH2-, φC(O)CH(φ)CH2-, (CH3)2CHC(O)NHCH(φ)-, CH3CH2OCH2-, CH3OC(O)CH(CH3)(CH2)3-, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, 1 -(trifluoromethyl)ethyl, 2-CH3-benzofuran-3-yl, 2-(2,4- dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, φSO2CH2-, 3-cyclohexyl-rc-propyl, CF3CH2CH2CH2- and N-pyrrolidinyl.
17. The method according to Claim 4 wherein each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
18. The method according to Claim 17 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, π-propyl, z'so-propyl, π-butyl. wo-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-w-butyl, 6-fluoro-H-hexyl, phenyl. benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, sø-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl. -CH2-indol-3-yl. / (phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl, rø-methoxyphenyl, /7-methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, m-hydroxybenzyl, -hydroxybenzyl, -nitrobenzyl, m-trifluoromethylphenyl,/?-(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, / (CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, /?-(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, -(N-mo holino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl. -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl. -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl. thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans). -CH2OH. -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, - CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino),/?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
19. The method according to Claim 4 wherein R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
20. The method according to Claim 19 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, so-propyl. n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6-fluoro-n- hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, z'so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl. -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, /?-(phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl. w-fluorophenyl, /^-fluorophenyl, w-methoxyphenyl, /?-methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, w-hydroxybenzyl, -hydroxybenzyl, -nitrobenzyl, w-trifluoromethylphenyl, -(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, / (CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, /?-(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, -( -moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methylcyclopentyl. cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, - CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), -(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
21. The method according to Claim 4 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
22. The method according to Claim 21 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, and cyclohexyl.
23. The method according to Claim 4 wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
24. The method according to Claim 4 wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted amino, phenyl, substituted phenyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and thioalkoxy.
25. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formula I:
wherein
Wis a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
CH— C — NH- or -(CH) — NH-
O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2)a-NH-;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl. alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substituted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- ;
Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R1 to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro. or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to 6;
/is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
26. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein a is
2.
27. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein rings A and B are preferably independently selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
28. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 27 wherein rings A and B are independently aryl.
29. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein m is zero.
30. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 29 wherein R1 is aryl or heteroaryl.
31. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 30 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group ofthe foπnula:
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring wherein the heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring contains from 3 to 8 atoms of which from 1 to 3 are heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur Rb and R are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano. trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl,
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group, and
(g) alkyl.
32. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 30 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of mono-, di- and tri-substituted phenyl groups.
33. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 32 wherein R' is a disubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl, and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
34. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 32 wherein R1 is a monosubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl. 4-bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- iodophenyl, 4-(phenylcarbonyl)-phenyl, and 4-(l -ethoxy )ethy lphenyl.
35. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 32 wherein R' is a trisubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,4,5- trifluorophenyl and 3,4,5-trichlorophenyl.
36. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 30 wherein R1 is selected from 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6- yl, 5-indolyl, and phenyl.
37. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein m is one.
38. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 37 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 2- chlorophenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2- methylphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4- hydroxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl, 4-butoxyphenyl, 4- so- propylphenyl, 4-phenoxyphenyl. 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-hydroxymethylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 3- chlorophenyl, 3-bromophenyl. 3-phenoxyphenyl, 3-thiomethoxyphenyl, 3- methylphenyl, 3-trifluoromethylphenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl. 2,3-difluorophenyl, 2,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3, 4-methy lenedioxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 2,4- dichlorophenyl, 2,4-difluorophenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl, 3,4,5-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,3 ,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 2-fluoro-4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- benzyloxyphenyl, 2-chloro-6-fluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-6-chlorophenyl. 2,3,4,5,6- pentafluorophenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 4-phenylphenyl, 2-fluoro-3- trifluoromethylphenyl, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-pheny lethy 1, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4- phenyl-n-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, so-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, so-valeryl, n-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1-enyl, cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-cyclopentyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopentyl, pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, fluoropyridyls (including 5-fluoropyrid-3-yl), chloropyridyls (including 5-chloropyrid-3-yl), thien-2-yl. thien-3-yl, benzothiazol- 4-yl, 2-phenylbenzoxazol-5-yl, furan-2-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, thionaphthen-2-yl, thionaphthen-3-yl, thionaphthen-4-yl, 2-chlorothiophen-5-yl, 3-methylisoxazol-5- yl, 2-(thiophenyl)thien-5-yl, 6-methoxythionaphthen-2-yl, 3 -phenyl- 1,2,4- thiooxadiazol-5-yl, 2-phenyloxazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, l-phenyl-tetraol-5-yl, allyl, 2- (cyclohexyl)ethyl, (CH3)2CH=CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)-, φC(O)CH2-, thien-2-yl- methyl, 2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl, 3-(thien-2-yl)-n-propyl, 2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4- methoxyphenyl)ethyl. norboran-2-yl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (2- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4- hydroxyphenyl)methyl. (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl. (4-methylphenyl)methyl, (4- fluorophenyl)methyl. (4-fluorophenoxy)methyl. (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, (4- chlorophenyl)methyl, (2-chlorophenyl)methyl. (l-phenyl)ethyl, (l-(p- chlorophenyl)ethyl, ( 1 -trifluoromethyl)ethyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)ethyl, CH3OC(O)CH2-, benzylthiomethyl, 5-(methoxycarbonyl)-n-pentyl, 3- (methoxycarbonyl)-n-propyl, indan-2-yl, (2-methylbenzofuran-3-yl), methoxymethyl, CH3CH=CH-, CH3CH2CH=CH-, (4-chlorophenyl)C(O)CH2-. (4-fluorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-methoxyphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-(fluorophenyl)- NHC(O)CH2-. 1-phenyl-n-butyl, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, (CH3)2NC(O)CH2-, (φ)2CH HC(O)CH2CH2-, methylcarbonylmethyl, (2,4-dimethylphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-methoxyphenyl-C(O)CH2-, phenyl-C(O)CH2-, CH3C(O)N(φ)-, ethenyl, methylthiomethyl, (CH3)3CNHC(O)CH2-, 4-fluorophenyl-C(O)CH2-, diphenylmethyl, phenoxymethyl, 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl-CH2-, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, (CH3)3COC(O)NHCH2-, trαns-styryl, H2NC(O)CH2CH2-, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl-C(O)CH2, φC(O)NHCH(φ)CH2-, mesityl, CH3CH(=NHOH)CH2-, 4-CH3-φ-NHC(O)CH2CH2-, φC(O)CH(φ)CH2-, (CH3)2CHC(O)NHCH(φ , CH3CH2OCH2-, CH3OC(O)CH(CH3)(CH2)3-, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl, 2-CH3-benzofuran-3-yl, 2-(2,4- dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, φSO2CH2-, 3-cyclohexyl-n-propyl, CF3CH CH2CH2- and N-pyrrolidinyl.
39. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
40. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 39 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, /so-propyl, n- butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6- fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, so-but- 2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl,p-(phenyl)phenyl, o- fluorophenyl. w-fluorophenyl, ^-fluorophenyl, w-methoxyphenyl, p- methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, w-hydroxybenzyl, /7-hydroxybenzyl, p- nitrobenzyl, w-trifluoromethylphenyl, p-(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, >-(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, -(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, ?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2) NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), -(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
41. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein R2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
42. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 41 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n- butyl, 6-fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, /so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl,/?-(phenyl)phenyl, o- fluorophenyl, m-fluorophenyl, -fluorophenyl, n-methoxyphenyl,/ methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, w-hydroxybenzyl, p-hydroxybenzyl, p- nitrobenzyl, /n-trifluoromethylphenyl. p-(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl. /7-(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl.^-(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, -(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3. -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), -( -moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
43. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
44. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 43 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl. 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2.2,2-trifluoroethyl. and cyclohexyl.
45. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
46. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 25 wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl. substituted alkyl, substituted amino, phenyl. substituted phenyl. cycloalkyl. heteroaryl, heterocyclic and thioalkoxy.
7. A compound of formula I:
wherein
W is a cyclic group selected from the group consisting of:
wherein ring A, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring B, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring selected from the group consisting of aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; ring C, together with the atoms to which it is attached, forms a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring;
Y is represented by the formula:
R2 R2'
CH— C — NH- or -(CH) — NH-
O
provided that at least one Y is -(CHR2 )a-NH-;
R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substituted thioalkoxy;
Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S(O)2- ;
Z is represented by the formula -T-CX'X"C(O)-, wherein T is selected from the group consisting of a bond covalently linking R' to -CX'X"-, oxygen, sulfur and -NR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, acyl, alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group;
X' is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro,
X" is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro, or X' and X" together form an oxo group; a is an integer from 2 to 6;
/is an integer from 0 to 2; m is an integer equal to 0 or 1 ; n is an integer equal to 1 or 2; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
48. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein a is 2.
49. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein rings A and B are preferably independently selected from the group consisting of aryl. cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
50. The compound according to Claim 49 wherein rings A and B are independently aryl.
51. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein m is zero.
52. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R' is aryl or heteroaryl.
53. The compound according to Claim 52 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of the formula:
Rb
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido. cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring wherein the heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring contains from 3 to 8 atoms of which from 1 to 3 are heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl. alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl, (d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl,
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group, and
(g) alkyl.
54. The compound according to Claim 52 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of mono-, di- and tri-substituted phenyl groups.
55. The compound according to Claim 54 wherein R1 is a disubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl, and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
56. The compound according to Claim 54 wherein R1 is a monosubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl, 4- bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl. 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- iodophenyl, 4-(phenylcarbonyl)-phenyl, and 4-(l-ethoxy)ethy lphenyl.
57. The compound according to Claim 54 wherein R1 is a trisubstituted phenyl selected from the group consisting of 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl and 3,4,5- trichlorophenyl.
58. The compound according to Claim 52 wherein R1 is selected from 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, 5-indolyl, and phenyl.
59. The compound according to Claim 53 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, n- butyl, n-pentyl and isovaleryl.
60. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein m is one.
61. The compound according to Claim 59 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2- fluorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2- methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl, 4-butoxyphenyl. 4- so-propylphenyl, 4- phenoxyphenyl, 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-hydroxymethylphenyl, 3- methoxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 3-nitrophenyl. 3-fluorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 3-phenoxyphenyl, 3-thiomethoxyphenyl, 3 -methylphenyl, 3- trifluoromethylphenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl, 2,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3,4- methylenedioxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 2,4- dichlorophenyl, 2,4-difluorophenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl, 3,4,5-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2.3,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 2-fluoro-4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- benzyloxyphenyl, 2-chloro-6-fluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-6-chlorophenyl, 2,3,4,5,6- pentafluorophenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 4-phenylphenyl, 2-fluoro-3- trifluoromethylphenyl, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4- phenyl-n-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl. iso-propyl, n-butyl, z'sø-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, iso-valeryl, n-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1-enyl, cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH2- cyclopropyl. -CH -cyclobutyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-cyclopentyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopentyl, pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, fluoropyridyls (including 5-fluoropyrid-3-yl), chloropyridyls (including 5-chloropyrid-3-yl), thien-2-yl, thien-3-yl, benzothiazol- 4-yl, 2-phenylbenzoxazol-5-yl, furan-2-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, thionaphthen-2-yl. thionaphthen-3-yl, thionaphthen-4-yl. 2-chlorothiophen-5-yl, 3-methylisoxazol-5- yl, 2-(thiophenyl)thien-5-yl, 6-methoxythionaphthen-2-yl, 3-phenyl- 1,2,4- thiooxadiazol-5-yl, 2-pheny loxazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, l-phenyl-tetraol-5-yl, allyl, 2- (cyclohexyl)ethyl, (CH3)2CH=CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)-, φC(O)CH2-, thien-2-yl- methyl, 2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl, 3-(thien-2-yl)-n-propyl, 2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4- methoxyphenyl)ethyl, norboran-2-yl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (2- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4- hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methylphenyl)methyl, (4- fluorophenyl)methyl, (4-fluorophenoxy)methyl, (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, (4- chlorophenyl)methyl, (2-chlorophenyl)methyl, (l-phenyl)ethyl, (\-(p- chlorophenyl)ethyl, ( 1 -trifluoromethyl)ethyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)ethyl, CH3OC(O)CH2-, benzylthiomethyl, 5-(methoxycarbonyl)-n-pentyl, 3- (methoxycarbonyl)-n-propyl, indan-2-yl, (2-methylbenzofuran-3-yl), methoxymethyl, CH3CH=CH-, CH3CH2CH=CH-, (4-chlorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-fluorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-methoxyphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-(fluorophenyl)- NHC(O)CH2-, 1-phenyl-n-butyl, (φ)2CH HC(O)CH2CH2-, (CH3)2NC(O)CH2-, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, methylcarbonylmethyl, (2,4-dimethylphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-methoxyphenyl-C(O)CH2-, phenyl-C(O)CH2-. CH3C(O)N(φ)-, ethenyl. methylthiomethyl, (CH3)3CNHC(O)CH2-. 4-fluorophenyl-C(O)CH2-, diphenylmethyl, phenoxymethyl, 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl-CH2-, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, (CH3)3COC(O)NHCH2-, trons-styryl, H2NC(O)CH2CH2-, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl-C(O)CH2, φC(O)NHCH(φ)CH2-, mesityl, CH3CH(=NHOH)CH2-, 4-CH3-φ-NHC(O)CH2CH2-, φC(O)CH(φ)CH2-, (CH3)2CHC(O)NHCH(φ)-, CH3CH2OCH2-, CH3OC(O)CH(CH3)(CH2)3-, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl, 2-CH3-benzofuran-3-yl, 2-(2,4- dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, φSO2CH -, 3-cyclohexyl-n-propyl, CF3CH2CH2CH2- and N-pyrrolidinyl.
62. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl. cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
63. The compound according to Claim 61 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, /so-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec- butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6-fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, /so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, / (phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl, w-fluorophenyl, p- fluorophenyl, /n-methoxyphenyl, -methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, m- hydroxybenzyl, -hydroxybenzyl, -nitrobenzyl, w-trifluoromethylphenyl, p- (CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl. -(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, ?-(HOOCCH2O)- benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2- thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2- methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)-CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), -(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)- benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
64. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein R2' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
65. The compound according to Claim 64 wherein R2' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, /so-propyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6-fluoro-n- hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl. allyl, z'so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, - CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl,/?-(phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl, m- fluorophenyl, ^-fluorophenyl, m-methoxyphenyl, -methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, /n-hydroxybenzyl, p-hydroxybenzyl, / nitrobenzyl, m- trifluoromethylphenyl, -(CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, -(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, -(HOOCCH2O)-benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, -(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2-thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc. -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
66. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl.
67. The compound according to Claim 66 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, 2-methypropyl, hexyl, methoxycarbonylmethyl, 3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, cyclopropylmethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, and cyclohexyl.
68. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein R4 is hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
69. The compound according to Claim 47 wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted amino, phenyl, substituted phenyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and thioalkoxy.
70. The compound according to Claim 48 wherein W is selected from the group consisting of:
(a) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein each R6 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2-heteroaryl; each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxyalkyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halo, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, - SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, and -SO2- heteroaryl;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, acyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; p is an integer from 0 to 4; q is an integer from 0 to 4;
(b) a cyclic group of the foπnula:
wherein R6, R7, and ? are as defined above and r is an integer from 0 to 3;
(c) a cyclic group of the formula:
wherein R6 and p are as defined above;
(d) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6 and p are as defined above;
(e) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8 and /? are as defined above; and each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; and g is an integer from 0 to 2. (f) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8, R9, g and p are as defined above;
(g) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, each R8 and/? are as defined above;
(h) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, each R8, R9, g and /? are as defined above;
(i) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R°, R8 and /? are as defined above; and
R10 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, substimted alkenyl, alkynyl, substimted alkynyl, substimted amino, aryl, cycloalkyl, substimted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substimted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, thioalkoxy and substimted thioalkoxy;
(j) a cyclic ring of the foπnula:
wherein R6, R10 and/? are as defined above; and
D-E is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, alkenylene, substimted alkylene, substimted alkenylene and -N=CH-;
(k) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8, R9, g and/? are as defined above; and Q is oxygen, sulfur, -S(O)- or -S OA
(1) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R6, R8 and /? are as defined above; and
(m) a cyclic ring of the formula:
wherein R8 is as defined above.
71. The compound according to Claim 70 wherein each R6 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkoxy and halo; each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkoxy and halo; each R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; each R? is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl, cycloalkyl and aryl; and g, p, q and r are 0 or 1.
72. The compound according to Claim 71 wherein g, p, q and r are 0.
73. The compound according to Claim 71 or 72 wherein m is 1.
74. The compound according to Claim 73 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2- fluorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-nitrophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2- methoxyphenyl, 2-phenoxyphenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-ethoxyphenyl, 4-butoxy phenyl, 4-/so-propylphenyl, 4- phenoxyphenyl, 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4-hydroxymethylphenyl, 3- methoxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 3-nitrophenyl. 3-fluorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 3-phenoxyphenyl, 3-thiomethoxyphenyl, 3 -methylphenyl, 3- trifluoromethylphenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl, 2,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3, 4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3,4- methylenedioxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 2,4- dichlorophenyl, 2,4-difluorophenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl, 3,4,5-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-tri-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,3,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- fluoro-2-trifluoromethylphenyl, 2-fluoro-4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 4- benzyloxyphenyl, 2-chloro-6-fluorophenyl, 2-fluoro-6-chlorophenyl, 2,3,4,5,6- pentafluorophenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 4-phenylphenyl, 2-fluoro-3- trifluoromethylphenyl, adamantyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyl-n-propyl, 4- phenyl-n-butyl, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, z'so-propyl, n-butyl, z'so-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, z'so-valeryl, n-hexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopent-1-enyl, cyclopent-2-enyl, cyclohex-1-enyl, -CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-cyclopentyl, -CH2CH2- cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclobutyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopentyl, pyrid-2-yl, pyrid-3-yl, pyrid-4-yl, fluoropyridyls (including 5-fluoropyrid-3-yl), chloropyridyls (including 5-chloropyrid-3-yl), thien-2-yl, thien-3-yl, benzothiazol- 4-yl, 2-phenylbenzoxazol-5-yl, furan-2-yl, benzofuran-2-yl, thionaphthen-2-yl, thionaphthen-3-yl, thionaphthen-4-yl, 2-chlorothiophen-5-yl, 3-methylisoxazol-5- yl, 2-(thiophenyl)thien-5-yl, 6-methoxythionaphthen-2-yl, 3-phenyl- 1,2,4- thiooxadiazol-5-yl, 2-phenyloxazol-4-yl, indol-3-yl, l-phenyl-tetraol-5-yl, allyl, 2- (cyclohexyl)ethyl, (CH3)2CH=CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)-, φC(O)CH2-, thien-2-yl- methyl, 2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl, 3-(thien-2-yl)-n-propyl, 2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4- methoxyphenyl)ethyl, norboran-2-yl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (2- methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4- hydroxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl, (4-methylphenyl)methyl, (4- fluorophenyl)methyl, (4-fluorophenoxy)methyl, (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, (4- chlorophenyl)methyl, (2-chlorophenyl)methyl, (l-phenyl)ethyl, (l-( ?- chlorophenyl)ethyl, (l-trifluoromethyl)ethyl, (4-methoxyphenyl)ethyl, CH3OC(O)CH2-, benzylthiomethyl, 5-(methoxycarbonyl)-n-pentyl, 3- (methoxycarbonyl)-n-propyl, indan-2-yl, (2-methylbenzofuran-3-yl), methoxymethyl, CH3CH=CH-, CH3CH2CH=CH-, (4-chlorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-fluorophenyl)C(O)CH2-, (4-methoxyphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-(fluorophenyl)- NHC(O)CH2-, 1-phenyl-n-butyl, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, (CH3)2NC(O)CH2-, (φ)2CHNHC(O)CH2CH2-, methylcarbonylmethyl, (2,4-dimethylphenyl)C(O)CH2-, 4-methoxyphenyl-C(O)CH2-, phenyl-C(O)CH2-, CH3C(O)N(φ)-, ethenyl, methylthiomethyl, (CH3)3CNHC(O)CH2-, 4-fluorophenyl-C(O)CH2-, diphenylmethyl, phenoxymethyl, 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl-CH2-, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, (CH3)3COC(O)NHCH2-, trαns-styryl, H2NC(O)CH2CH2-, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl-C(O)CH2, φC(O)NHCH(φ)CH2-, mesityl, CH3CH(=NHOH)CH2-, 4-CH3-φ-NHC(O)CH2CH2-, φC(O)CH(φ)CH2-, (CH3)2CHC(O)NHCH(φ)-, CH3CH2OCH2-, CH3OC(O)CH(CH3)(CH2)3-, 2,2,2- trifluoroethyl, l-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl, 2-CH3-benzofuran-3-yl, 2-(2,4- dichlorophenoxy)ethyl, φSO2CH2-, 3-cyclohexyl-n-propyl, CF3CH2CH2CH2- and N-pyrrolidinyl.
75. The compound according to Claim 74 wherein each R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
76. The compound according to Claim 75 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, zso-propyl, n-butyl, z'so-butyl, sec- butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6-fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, z'so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, ?-(phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl, -fluorophenyl, /?- fluorophenyl, /n-methoxy phenyl, /?-methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, m- hydroxybenzyl, /?-hydroxybenzyl, /?-nitrobenzyl, m-trifluoromethylphenyl, /?- (CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, ?-(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, ?-(HOOCCH2O)- benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2- thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2- methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)- benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
77. The compound according to Claim 73 wherein R2' is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, zso-propyl, n-butyl, z'so-butyl, sec- butyl, tert-butyl, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2-methyl-n-butyl, 6-fluoro-n-hexyl, phenyl, benzyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl, allyl, z'so-but-2-enyl, 3-methylpentyl, -CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2CH2-cyclopropyl, -CH2CH2-cyclohexyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, /?-(phenyl)phenyl, o-fluorophenyl, /n-fluorophenyl, /?- fluorophenyl, /n-methoxyphenyl, ?-methoxyphenyl, phenethyl, benzyl, m- hydroxybenzyl, ?-hydroxybenzyl, ?-nitrobenzyl, /n-trifluoromethylphenyl, /?- (CH3)2NCH2CH2CH2O-benzyl, -(CH3)3COC(O)CH2O-benzyl, ?-(HOOCCH2O)- benzyl, 2-aminopyrid-6-yl, /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)-benzyl, -CH2CH2C(O)NH2, -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2-(3-tetrahydrofuranyl), -CH2- thiophen-2-yl, -CH2(l-methyl)cyclopropyl, -CH2-thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, -CH2-C(O)O-t-butyl, -CH2-C(CH3)3, -CH2CH(CH2CH3)2, 2- methylcyclopentyl, cyclohex-2-enyl, -CH[CH(CH3)2]COOCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2, -CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CHCH3 (cis and trans), -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -CH(O-t-butyl)CH3, -CH2OCH3, -(CH2)4NH-Boc, -(CH2)4NH2, -CH2-pyridyl, pyridyl, -CH2-naphthyl, -CH2-(N-moφholino), /?-(N-moφholino-CH2CH2O)- benzyl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, 5- chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, 6-methoxynaphth-2-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, thien-2-yl and thien-3-yl.
78. The compound according to Claim 77 wherein R2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substimted alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
79. The compound according to Claim 75 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl and aryl.
80. The compound according to Claim 77 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substimted alkyl and aryl.
81. The compound according to Claim 78 wherein R2 is methy.
82. The compound according to Claim 81 wherein R1 is alkyl.
83. The compound according to Claim 82 wherein R3 is alkyl.
EP99937164A 1998-06-22 1999-06-21 Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis. Withdrawn EP1089981A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10272898A 1998-06-22 1998-06-22
US102728 1998-06-22
PCT/US1999/014007 WO1999067220A1 (en) 1998-06-22 1999-06-21 Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP1089981A1 true EP1089981A1 (en) 2001-04-11

Family

ID=22291387

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP99937164A Withdrawn EP1089981A1 (en) 1998-06-22 1999-06-21 Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis.

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1089981A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2002518482A (en)
AU (1) AU5204799A (en)
CA (1) CA2325388A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999067220A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NZ525513A (en) 1998-08-07 2004-09-24 Pont Pharmaceuticals Du Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of Abeta protein production
US6737038B1 (en) 1998-11-12 2004-05-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
EP1313426A4 (en) 1998-12-24 2003-05-28 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Co Succinoylamino benzodiazepines as inhibitors of a-beta protein production
US6960576B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2005-11-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6503902B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2003-01-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of a β protein production
WO2001027108A1 (en) 1999-10-08 2001-04-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company AMINO LACTAM SULFONAMIDES AS INHIBITORS OF Aβ PROTEIN PRODUCTION
WO2001060826A2 (en) 2000-02-17 2001-08-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company SUCCINOYLAMINO CARBOCYCLES AND HETEROCYCLES AS INHIBITORS OF Aβ PROTEIN PRODUCTION
BR0110051A (en) * 2000-04-03 2004-12-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Co Compound, Compound Use, Pharmaceutical Composition and Method of Treatment of Alzheimer's Disease
CA2404273A1 (en) 2000-04-11 2001-10-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of a.beta. protein production
AU2001261728A1 (en) 2000-05-17 2001-11-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Use of small molecule radioligands for diagnostic imaging
EP1268450A1 (en) 2000-06-01 2003-01-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of a-beta protein production
US6432944B1 (en) 2000-07-06 2002-08-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzodiazepinone β-amyloid inhibitors: arylacetamidoalanyl derivatives
TW200502221A (en) 2002-10-03 2005-01-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel lactams and uses thereof
CA2628193C (en) * 2005-11-01 2012-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Novel 1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5-diones with therapeutic properties
CN101284828B (en) * 2007-04-12 2011-04-27 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Cycloheptapyridine compounds, preparation method thereof, use and pharmaceutical compositions containing the compounds
AU2010216632A1 (en) * 2009-02-17 2011-08-04 Msd K.K. 1,4-benzodiazepin-2-on derivatives
US9126978B2 (en) 2009-11-17 2015-09-08 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan 1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5-diones and related compounds with therapeutic properties

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
HUP0000492A3 (en) * 1996-11-22 2000-06-28 Lilly Co Eli N-(aryl/heteroarylacetyl) amino acid esters, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
KR20000069075A (en) * 1996-11-22 2000-11-25 진 엠. 듀발 N-(Aryl/Heteroaryl/Alkylacethyl)Amino Acid Amides, Pharmaceutical Compositions Comprising Same, and Methods for Inhibiting Beta-Amyloid Peptide Release and/or its Synthesis by Use of Such Compounds

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of WO9967220A1 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2002518482A (en) 2002-06-25
AU5204799A (en) 2000-01-10
WO1999067220A1 (en) 1999-12-29
CA2325388A1 (en) 1999-12-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6509331B1 (en) Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
AU749658C (en) Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6951854B1 (en) Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
EP1089977A1 (en) Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis
WO1999066934A1 (en) CYCLIC AMINO ACID COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
EP1089980A1 (en) Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis
EP1089981A1 (en) Compounds for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis.
WO1999032453A1 (en) POLYCYCLIC α-AMINO-⊂-CAPROLACTAMS AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
CA2390376A1 (en) .beta.-aminoacid compounds useful for inhibiting .beta.-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis
US6552013B1 (en) Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6774125B2 (en) Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6528505B1 (en) Cyclic amino acid compounds pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6958330B1 (en) Polycyclic α-amino-ε-caprolactams and related compounds
US6906056B2 (en) Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US20050192265A1 (en) Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and related compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
CZ187699A3 (en) Cycloalkyl, lactam, lactone and the like compounds, pharmaceutical preparations in which they are comprised and methods of inhibiting release and/or formation of beta-amyloid peptides by making use of those compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20010119

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20050107

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION IS DEEMED TO BE WITHDRAWN

18D Application deemed to be withdrawn

Effective date: 20050518